User manual | NEC Xen Axis and Master Installation Manual

System Hardware Manual
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
A6-324000-642-01
Release 4.0
May 2001
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ii
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Section 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.1 Unique Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Section 2 Equipment Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2.1 Equipment List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Chapter 2
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Section 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Section 2 System Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Section 3 Maximum System Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Section 4 System Requirements and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.1 Cabling Requirements and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
4.2 Cabling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
4.3 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
4.4 Outside Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
4.5 Transmission, Network, and Control Specifications . . . . . . . .25
4.6 Dialling Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
4.7 Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
4.8 Weights and Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
4.9 External Equipment Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
4.10 Audible and Visual Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Chapter 3
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Section 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Section 2 Programming Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Section 3 Attendant Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Section 4 Programming from a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Section 5 Programming from a Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
Section 6 Xen Master Remote PC Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
6.1 Remote Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Section 7 Determining Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
7.1 Station Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
System Hardware Manual
iii
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Chapter 4
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Installing KSUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Section 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter 5
Section 2 Site Preparation and MDF/IDF Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Precautionary Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Surveying the Customer Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Selecting the Best Location for Proper Installation . . . . . . . .
2.4 Cabling to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Power Failure Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Fax CO Branch Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
45
45
46
48
58
59
Section 3 Installing The Xen Master KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Removing the KSU Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Installing a Front Cover Extender (FCE-U13 Unit). . . . . . . . .
3.4 Securing Cables Using the Velcro Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Wall Mounting the Basic KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Wall Mounting the Expansion KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Floor Mounting the Basic KSU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 Replacing the Power Supply Unit in the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10 Installing Built-In and External Batteries in the KSU . . . . . . .
59
59
60
60
63
64
67
68
69
72
76
Section 4 Installing the Xen Axis KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Removing the KSU Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Wall Mounting the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Replacing the Power Supply Unit in the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 Fuse Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 Installing Built-in and External Batteries in the KSU . . . . . . .
87
87
87
89
91
93
94
Installing Electronic Telephone Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
iv
Section 2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Inserting an ETU into the KSU Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Removing an ETU from the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
100
102
103
Section 3 Common Control ETUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 CPUB( )-U13 ETU (Xen Master Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 EXP-U13 ETU (Xen Master Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 MBD-U13 Unit for B48-U13 KSU (Xen Axis Only) . . . . . . . .
3.4 CLKG-U13 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 MIFM-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 KMM(XXX)UA Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 KML(XXX)UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
104
109
111
116
117
122
122
Table of Contents
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
Section 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
May 2001
Section 4 Interface ETUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 BRT(4)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 PRT(1)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 COI(4)-U( ) ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 COID(8)-U( ) ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 COID(4)-U( ) ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 DID(4)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 TLI(2)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
123
125
129
130
132
134
136
Section 5 Optional ETUs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
5.3 VDH2(8)-U13 ETU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5.4 VRS(4)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
5.5 VMS(2/4/8)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
5.6 FMS(2/4)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5.7 ECR-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5.9 CNF(8)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Chapter 6
Installing DTU-Type Multiline Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Section 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Section 2 Multiline Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 DTU-8-1A (WH) TEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 DTU-8D-1A (WH) TEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 DTU-16D-1A (WH) TEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 DTU-32D-1A (WH) TEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 DCU-60-1A (WH) CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
181
182
182
183
184
Section 3 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Section 4 Connecting an Attendant Console to a Multiline Terminal . . . . . . 186
Section 5 Adjusting the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Section 6 Installing Line Cards and Plastic Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6.1 Line Card and Plastic Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6.2 Plastic Panel Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Section 7 Removing Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
Section 8 Adjusting the Height of the Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
System Hardware Manual
v
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Chapter 7
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Installing Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Section 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Section 2 Preparing Multiline Terminal for Adapter Installation . . . . . . . . . . 193
Section 3 Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 ACA-UA Unit (AC adaptor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 ADA-UA Unit (Ancillary Device Adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 APR-UA Unit (Analogue Port Ringer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 CTA-UA Unit (Computer Telephony Application) . . . . . . . .
3.5 Computer Telephony Adapter with USB Interface . . . . . . . .
3.6 HFU-UA (WH) Unit (Handsfree Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 PCT( )-U13 Unit (PC Telephony Board). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 SLT(1)-U13 ADP (Single Line Telephone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 VDD-UA Unit (Voice/Data Unit for Digital Terminals) . . . . . .
3.10 Wall Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11 Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12 Station Background Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13 Paging Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14 Connecting a KSU to a Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 8
196
196
197
203
207
209
223
225
227
229
231
239
240
240
240
Installing ETW-Type Multiline Telephones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Section 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Section 2 ETW-type Multiline Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Section 3 Connecting an Etw-type Multiline Terminal to the Xen System . .
3.1 Terminal Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Modular Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Attach a Multiline Terminal to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary ofAbbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
Appendix A
246
246
246
247
vi
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Chapter 1
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Figure 1-1
System Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Chapter 2
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Figure 2-1
System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chapter 3
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
There are no figures to list for this chapter.
Chapter 4
Installing KSUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Figure 4-10
Figure 4-11
Figure 4-12
Figure 4-13
Figure 4-14
Figure 4-15
Figure 4-16
Figure 4-17
Figure 4-18
Figure 4-19
Figure 4-20
Figure 4-21
Figure 4-22
Figure 4-23
Figure 4-24
Figure 4-25
Figure 4-26
Figure 4-27
Figure 4-28
Figure 4-29
Figure 4-30
Xen Master - Power Failure Transfer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Xen Axis - Power Failure Transfer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Front Panel of the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Cover Extender (FCE-U13 Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the Cable Clamp on the KSU Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Sponge to the Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Front Cover and Front Cover Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Front Cover and the Front Cover Extender to the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Threading the Velcro Strap Through the Hook on the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Threading the Velcro Strap to Secure One or Two Amphenol Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Threading the Velcro Strap to Secure Three Amphenol Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hanging the Basic KSU on the Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing the Basic KSU to the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Expansion Wall Mount Bracket to the Basic Wall Mount Bracket . . . . . .
Floor Mounting the Basic KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing the KSU to the Floor Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DC Expansion Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Frame Ground Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSU Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Wires to the PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the PSU onto the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the PSU Power Cable to the Basic KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Battery Expansion Cables to the Expansion KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the PSU from the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSU Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Built-In Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing the Batteries into the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Batteries to the Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Hardware Manual
58
58
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
67
68
68
69
70
71
72
73
73
74
75
75
76
76
77
vii
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Figure 4-31
Figure 4-32
Figure 4-33
Figure 4-34
Figure 4-35
Figure 4-36
Figure 4-37
Figure 4-38
Figure 4-39
Figure 4-40
Figure 4-41
Figure 4-42
Figure 4-43
Figure 4-44
Figure 4-45
Figure 4-46
Figure 4-47
Figure 4-48
Figure 4-49
Figure 4-50
Figure 4-51
Figure 4-52
Figure 4-53
Figure 4-54
Figure 4-55
Figure 4-56
Figure 4-57
Figure 4-58
Figure 4-59
Floor Mount Anchor Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fitting the Battery Box to Floor Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Installing EBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Installing the Anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Secure the L Type Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Installation Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Secure Anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Installing External Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Attaching Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Attaching Cables to External Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Right Side of Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Installing the Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Connecting the EBB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Clamping the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Removing the KSU Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Threading the Velcro Strap Through the Hook on the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using the Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Hanging the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Installing Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
KSU Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Disconnecting Cable from the PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Installing the KSU in the PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
PSU Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Connecting Built-in Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Installing the Batteries in the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Connecting the Batteries to the Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Connecting Cables for External Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Connecting the External Power Cables to the PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Reinstalling the KSU Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Chapter 5
Installing Electronic Telephone Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Figure 1-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7
Figure 5-8
Figure 5-9
Figure 5-10
Figure 5-11
Inserting the ETU into the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Wrist Strap Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Handling an ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Safety Precautions when Setting Switches on an ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Sliding the ETU into the KSU Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Lifting the Ejector Tabs on the ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
CPUB( )-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
EXP-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Connecting the Expansion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
KSU MBD-U13 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
KSU Backup Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
viii
List of Figures
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
May 2001
Figure 5-12
Figure 5-13
Figure 5-14
Figure 5-15
Figure 5-16
Figure 5-17
Figure 5-18
Figure 5-19
Figure 5-20
Figure 5-21
Figure 5-22
Figure 5-23
Figure 5-24
Figure 5-25
Figure 5-26
Figure 5-27
Figure 5-28
Figure 5-30
Figure 5-29
Figure 5-31
Figure 5-32
Figure 5-33
Figure 5-34
Figure 5-35
Figure 5-36
Figure 5-37
Figure 5-38
Figure 5-39
Figure 5-40
Figure 5-41
CLKG-U13 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIFM-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIFA-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BRT(4)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRT(1)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COI(8)-U( ) ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COI(4)-U( ) ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COID(8)-U( ) ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COID(4)-U( ) ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DID(4)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TLI(2)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESI(8)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLI(8)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLI(4)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPX(2)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBR( )-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDH2(8)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 Base 2 Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDH2(8)-U13 ETU Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Cover Extender for VDH2(8)-U13 ETUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDH2(8)-U13 LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VRS(4)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VMS( )-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS( )-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ECR-U13 Block Diagram - External Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ECR-U13 Block Diagram - External Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ECR-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPH(4)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CNF(8)-U13 ETU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 6
Installing DTU-Type Multiline Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 6-6
Figure 6-7
Figure 6-8
Figure 6-9
Figure 6-10
DTU-8-1A (WH) TEL Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTU-8D-1A (WH) TEL Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTU-16D-1A (WH) TEL Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTU-32D-1A (WH) TEL Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU-60-1A (WH) Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leading Line Cords on a Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an Attendant Console to a Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Line Cord and AC adaptor when Installing an Attendant Console . . .
Attendant Console and Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Hardware Manual
116
117
120
123
125
128
129
131
133
135
136
138
140
142
144
152
155
156
156
157
159
161
162
166
170
173
174
176
178
179
181
182
183
184
184
185
185
186
186
187
ix
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Figure 6-11
Figure 6-12
Figure 6-13
Figure 6-14
Figure 6-15
Figure 6-16
Figure 6-17
Figure 6-18
Figure 6-19
Adjusting the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Installing Line Card and Plastic Panel on a Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Installing Plastic Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Removing the Plastic Panel from the Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Removing Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Locating the Adjustment Tabs on the Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Raising the Base Plate on the Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Adjusting the Line Cord Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Lowering the Base Plate on the Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Chapter 7
Installing Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-4
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Figure 7-7
Figure 7-8
Figure 7-9
Figure 7-10
Figure 7-11
Figure 7-12
Figure 7-13
Figure 7-14
Figure 7-15
Figure 7-16
Figure 7-17
Figure 7-18
Figure 7-19
Figure 7-20
Figure 7-21
Figure 7-22
Figure 7-23
Figure 7-24
Figure 7-25
Figure 7-26
Figure 7-27
Figure 7-28
Figure 7-29
Figure 7-30
Figure 7-31
Raising the Base Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Unlocking Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Releasing Right Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Removing Bottom Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Removing Base Plate Dummy End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Cutting Dummy End in Half . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Installing Adapter in Connector 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Installing Dummy End B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
ACA-UA Unit Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Attaching the ADA-UA Unit to the Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Leading the Audio Cable out from the ADA-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
ADA-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Attaching Cables to the ADA-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
ADA-UA Unit Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
APR-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Attaching the Unit to the Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Leading the Telephone Cord out from the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Closing the Base Plate Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
APR-UA Unit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Connecting Cables on the APR-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Attaching an Xen Multiline Terminal to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
CTA-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Attaching the Unit to the Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Connecting the RS-232C Cable to the CTA-UA Unit on the Multiline Terminal . . . . . . 208
CTU(S)-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
CTU(S) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Base of DTU-type MLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Opening the Base of the DTU-type MLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Installing the CTU(S)-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Removing the End Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Closing the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
x
List of Figures
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
May 2001
Figure 7-32
Figure 7-33
Figure 7-34
Figure 7-35
Figure 7-36
Figure 7-37
Figure 7-38
Figure 7-39
Figure 7-40
Figure 7-41
Figure 7-42
Figure 7-43
Figure 7-44
Figure 7-45
Figure 7-46
Figure 7-47
Figure 7-48
Figure 7-49
Figure 7-50
Figure 7-51
Figure 7-52
Figure 7-53
Figure 7-54
Figure 7-55
Figure 7-56
Figure 7-57
Figure 7-58
Figure 7-59
Figure 7-60
Figure 7-61
Figure 7-62
Figure 7-63
Figure 7-64
Figure 7-65
Figure 7-66
Figure 7-67
Figure 7-68
Figure 7-69
Figure 7-70
Figure 7-71
Figure 7-72
Figure 7-73
Connecting AC Adaptor to CTU(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the CTU(S) Line Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing the Line Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Line to the CTU(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the USB to the CTU(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTU(C) Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTU(C) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base of DTU-type MLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Base of the DTU-type MLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the CTU(C)-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the End Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting AC Adapter to CTU(C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the CTU(C) Line Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing the Line Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Line to the CTU(C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the LAN (PC) to the CTU(C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the USB to the CTU(C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HFU-UA (WH) Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microphone with Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching a Microphone to a Multiline Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HFU-UA (WH) Unit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Single Line Telephone to the System using an SLT(1) U13 ADP . . . . .
Connecting the SLT(1)-U13 ADP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Screws from the SLT(1)-U13 ADP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the SLT(1)-U13 ADP to the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDD-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Cables on the VDD-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning the Handset Hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Knockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Base Plate to the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wall Mounting using a Modular Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plugging in the Line Cord using a Wall Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plugging in the Line Cord Using a Modular Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Bottom Tabs of the Multiline Terminal to the Base Cover . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Top Tabs of the Multiline Terminal to the Base Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installed Wall Mount Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Tabs from the adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Tabs from the WMU-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leading the Line Cord out of the WMU-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Wall Mount Unit to the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching the Multiline Terminal to the WMU-UA Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Hardware Manual
213
214
214
215
215
216
217
218
218
219
219
220
220
221
221
222
222
223
223
224
224
225
227
228
228
229
229
230
231
232
232
233
233
234
234
235
235
236
236
237
237
238
xi
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Figure 7-74
Figure 7-75
Figure 7-76
Figure 7-77
Figure 7-78
Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Base Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Music Source Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Connecting a Music Source via a COI Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Connecting a PC to the KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Connecting an External Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Chapter 8
Installing ETW-Type Multiline Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Figure 8-1
Figure 8-2
Modular Terminal Connections for Multiline Terminals & Attendant Add-On Consoles 246
Connect an ETW-type Multiline Terminal to the Xen system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Chapter A Glossary of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
There are no figures to list for this chapter.
xii
List of Figures
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
List of Tables
Chapter 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Table 1-1
Equipment List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chapter 2
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Table 2-1
Table 2-2
Table 2-3
Table 2-4
Table 2-5
Table 2-6
Table 2-7
Table 2-8
Table 2-10
Table 2-9
Table 2-11
Table 2-12
Table 2-13
Table 2-14
Table 2-22
Table 2-23
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Maximum System Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Multiline Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Cable Connection between an Analogue Interface and a Single Line Telephone . . . . . 23
Cabling Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
DTMF Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Internal Backup Battery Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
DTMF Address Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
External Backup Battery Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
ETU Battery Backup Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Weights and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Music on Hold/Station Background Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Tone Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Multiline Terminal Flash Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chapter 3
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
Table 3-4
Table 3-5
Table 3-6
Table 3-7
Station Equipment Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Slot and System Port Numbers for a Xen System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Slot and System Port Numbers for Xen Axis System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Master Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone and CO Port Nos Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Axis Port Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of Required Interface ETUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4
Installing KSUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Table 4-1
Table 4-2
Table 4-3
MDF Cable Connections - Xen Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Power Fail Transfer Connections - Xen Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
MDF Cable Connections - Xen Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
System Hardware Manual
39
40
41
41
41
42
42
xiii
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Chapter 5
Installing Electronic Telephone Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Table 5-1
Table 5-2
Table 5-3
Table 5-4
Table 5-5
Table 5-6
Table 5-7
Table 5-8
Table 5-9
Table 5-10
Table 5-11
Table 5-12
Table 5-13
Table 5-14
Table 5-15
Table 5-16
Table 5-17
Table 5-18
Table 5-19
Table 5-20
Table 5-21
Table 5-22
Table 5-23
CPUB( )-U13 ETU Default Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIFM-U13 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIFA-U13 ETU Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRT(1)-U13 ETU Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TLI(2)-U13 ETU Default Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Gateway Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDH2(8)-U13 ETU Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDH2(8)-U13 ETU Default Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VRS(4)-U13 ETU Default Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Support Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VMS(2/4/8)-U13 ETU Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Support Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS(2/4)-U13 ETU Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Descriptions (CN2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPH(4)-U13 Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CNF(8)-U13 ETU Reset Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CNF(8)-U13 ETU Maximum Conference Time Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CNF(8)-U13 ETU Party Size Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 6
Installing DTU-Type Multiline Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
106
118
121
126
126
137
147
154
158
158
160
160
161
163
165
167
169
171
175
177
180
180
180
Chapter 7
Installing Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Table 7-1
Table 7-2
Table 7-3
Table 7-4
Table 7-5
Table 7-6
Table 7-7
ADA-UA Cable Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADA-UA Unit Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APR-UA Unit Switch Settings for SW1 and SW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HFU-UA (WH) Unit Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions and Communication Port Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Port Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 8
Installing ETW-Type Multiline Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
200
202
206
225
241
241
243
Chapter A Glossary of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
xiv
List of Tables
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
There are no tables to list for this chapter.
Preface
GENERAL INFORMATION
Congratulations! You have purchased the NEC Xen System
The Xen system is a feature-rich key system that provides over 200
features including Computer Telephony Integration, Least Cost Routing,
Automatic Call Distribution, ISDN-BRI Voice Trunks, and LAN/KTS Cabling
Integration.
The Xen system meets the customer needs today, and as business
expands the system can be expanded to grow as well.
The Xen system has a set of manuals that provide all the information
necessary to install and support the system. The manuals are described in
the rest of this preface.
THIS MANUAL
This manual is for the system installer. This manual provides detailed
instructions for installing the Xen KSUs, ETUs, Multiline Terminals and
optional equipment. This manual is divided into the following chapters.
Chapter 1 - Introduction
This chapter contains a brief description of the Xen System and provides a
detailed list of each unit of equipment available for the system.
Chapter 2 - System Specifications
This chapter provides the technician with detailed specifications for the Xen
system. This chapter should be carefully reviewed by a technician before
installing the system.
Chapter 3 - Hardware Requirements
This chapter provides the technician with the hardware requirements for the
Xen system. The technician should read this chapter before installing the
system.
Chapter 4 - Installing KSUs
This chapter provides the information necessary to install the basic and
expansion KSUs. The technician should become familiar with this section
before attempting installation.
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
Chapter 5 - Installing Electronic Telephone Units
This chapter provides instructions for installing the ETUs in the Basic and
Expansion KSUs.
System Hardware Manual
xvii
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Chapter 6 - Installing Xen Multiline Terminals
This chapter describes each terminal that is available with the Xen system
and provides installation instructions.
Chapter 7 - Installing Optional Equipment
This chapter provides installation instructions for optional equipment that
can be added to the system as customer business grows.
Chapter 8 - Installing Xen Professional Telephones
This chapter provides instructions for installing Xen Professional terminals
on the Xen system.
Chapter 9 - System Maintenance
This chapter provides the technician with a guide to troubleshooting and
diagnosing problems during and after system installation.
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
The Xen system has a set of manuals to provide all the information
necessary to install and support the system. The remaining manuals that
comprise the set are described below.
Xen Features and Specifications Manual
This manual provides details related to every feature available in the
system.
Xen Programming Manual
This manual provides instructions for programming the Xen system.
Xen Lease Cost Routing Manual
This manual provides instructions to the service
programming the customer site for least cost routing.
technician
for
This manual provides the service technician with instructions for
programming the ACD. This manual can also be used by the ACD
supervisor, at the customer site, to use to become familiar with the ACD/
MIS feature.
xviii
Preface
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
Xen Automatic Call Distribution Manual
Disclaimer
NEC shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, consequential or incidental
damages about the use of this equipment, manual or any related materials.
The information in this technical manual is advisory in nature and is subject
to change. NEC may make improvements and changes in the products
described in this manual without notice.
Changes will be periodically made to the information in the new editions.
Efforts have been made to ensure that the contents of this manual are
correct. Should you find any error, NEC welcomes your comments to
improve our communications. Please contact NEC on 1800 036 136.
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice at the
discretion of NEC Australia, Pty Ltd.
This document has been prepared for the use of employees and customers
of NEC Australia Pty Ltd and may not be reproduced without prior written
approval of NEC Australia Pty Ltd.
Copyright 2001
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
635 Ferntree Gully Road
Glen Waverley, VIC 3150
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
Integrated Communication Products Group
System Hardware Manual
xix
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
A6-324000-642-01 - Release 4.0
May 2001
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
xx
Disclaimer
Introduction
SECTION 1
GENERAL
INFORMATION
1.1
Chapter 1
Unique Design
The Xen Series of Key Telephone Systems have the power to meet
the ever-changing demands of today’s business communications.
The unique, compact design allows the system to be easily and
quickly installed.
The Xen systems can grow with your business. You can easily and
economically increase port size whenever necessary. The Xen
Master can accommodate one basic and two expansion KSUs to
provide a total of 192 ports. The Xen Axis can be expanded up to 48
ports with one single KSU, or can be transformed into a Xen system
with minimum effort and expense. Most cards and telephones are
compatible with both the Xen Master and Xen Axis systems.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Xen is a feature-rich system that provides telephone functions and
supports advanced features such as:
✆
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
✆
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
✆
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (Xen Master only)
✆
ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI Voice Trunks
✆
LAN/KTS Cabling Integration
✆
Caller ID
✆
Live Recording and Live Monitoring
✆
PC Attendant Console
✆
Integrated Digital Voice Mail
✆
Multilingual LCD Indication
✆
Multiline Conference Bridge
The Xen systems offer a variety of Multiline Terminals which are
compatible with both the Master and Axis systems. These Multiline
Terminals are available in 8-button, 16-button and 32-button
capacities and are offered as display and non-display models. A 60button Attendant Console is also available.
A customer with existing ETW terminals can easily connect them to
the Xen system, providing inexpensive migration from the NEC
Ranger NDK/DK systems. Most Xen system features are available
with the ETW-type Multiline Terminals.
System Hardware Manual
1-1
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
ETW-type terminals are not available in New Zealand.
The Xen systems support a wide range of additional equipment that
can be connected to the system to accommodate individual
customer needs.
Equipment such as Single Line Telephones, external speakers,
facsimile machines, external microphones, and headsets can be
connected. The diagram in Figure 1-1 System Configuration
Example shows a Xen system with standard and optional equipment
(some locally provided).
External
Speakerphone
External
Speaker
Least Cost Routing
Computer Telephony Integration
ElectraMail CTI (Unified Messaging)
Multiline Terminal
(DTU-type)
Master
Multiline Terminal
(ETW-type)
Headset
Station Message
Detail Recording
(SMDR)
Cordless
Singe Line
Telephone
Answering
Machine
Facsimile
Axis
Single Line Telephone &
Off-Premise Extension
Telephone
CO/PBX/Centrex/DID/Tie/
ISDN-BRI/ISDN-PRI
Automatic Call Distribution
PC Programming
(Xen Master only)
Figure 1-1 System Configuration Example
1-2
Introduction
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Attendant
Console
May 2001
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION
2.1
Equipment List
The following table lists all equipment used with the Xen system.
The equipment name, a description of the equipment, and the
maximum quantities that are allowed when a Basic KSU, a Basic
KSU with one Expansion KSU, and a Basic KSU with two Expansion
KSUs are included in the table.
Table 1-1 Equipment List
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
Description
Basic
KSU
Basic + 1
Expansion
KSU
Basic + 2
Expansion
KSUs
Xen Axis
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Key Service Units, Power Supply Units, and Adaptors
B64-U13 KSU
The Basic Key Service Unit (KSU) for the
Xen Master System provides service for
outside lines, Attendant Consoles, and
interconnection of the station terminals.
The basic KSU provides 64 ports and can
be expanded to a maximum of 192 ports
with the addition of two expansion KSUs.
System software allows a maximum of
184 ports to be used for stations and
trunks. There are two fixed slots and eight
flexible slots.
The P64-U13 PSU (power supply unit),
backup batteries, and two PFT relays are
included with this KSU.
E64-U13 KSU
The Expansion Key Service Unit (KSU) of 2 expansion
the Xen Master System provides an KSUs per
additional 64-port capacity. Two expansion
system
units can be added to the Basic KSU to
provide 128 ports with one expansion unit
and 192 port capacity with two expansion
units.
The Expansion KSU provides to fixed
slots
eight
flexible
slots
and
accommodates any interface card.
The P64-U13 PSU (power supply unit),
backup batteries, and two PFT relays are
included with this KSU.
B48-U13 KSU
The Key Service Unit of the Xen Axis
system accommodates the full 48 ports of
the system. Built onto the main board is
the CPU, eight Station Ports, one Music
On Hold source input, one External
Paging Relay circuit and one Power Fail
Transfer (PFT) relay.
The P64-U13 PSU (Power Supply Unit)
and backup batteries are also included.
P64-U13 PSU
The Power Supply Unit is included with 1 per KSU
the B64-U13 KSU, E64-U13 KSU and the
B48-U13 KSU.
FCE-U13 Unit
The Front Cover Extender Unit is required 1 per KSU
when a VDH2(8)-U13 ETU is installed into
a B64-U13 KSU or E64-U13 KSU.
System Hardware Manual
1 Basic
KSU per
system
N/A
N/A
N/A
1 per
system
N/A
1-3
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
Description
Basic
KSU
Basic + 1
Basic + 2
Expansion Expansion
KSU
KSUs
Xen Axis
Common Electronic Telephone Units
MIFM-U13 ETU This Unit provides additional memory for
processing
and
backup
for
PC
programming and SMDR, 512Kb of Static
Random Access Memory (SRAM), and
512Kb of Flash ROM memory.
1 per
system
If the LCR and/or Caller ID features are
desired, the following kit is required:
KMM(XXX)UA.
MIFA-U13 ETU This unit provides additional memory for
processing and backup for UCD, 512Kb of
Static Random Access Memory (SRAM),
and 512Kb of Flash ROM memory.
1 per
system
If ACD feature is desired, the
KMA(XXX)UA is required. (Xen Master
only)
KMM(XXX)UA
This unit is mounted on the MIFM-U13
1 per
ETU and adds LCR and Caller ID.
MIFM-U13
ETU
KMA(XXX)UA
This unit is mounted on the MIFA-U13
ETU and adds ACD.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
1 per
MIFA-U13
ETU
1-4
Introduction
May 2001
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
CPUB( )-U13
ETU
Description
Basic
KSU
Basic + 1
Expansion
KSU
Basic + 2
Expansion
KSUs
The Central Processing Unit contains a 1 CPU per
32-bit microprocessor that has overall
system
control of the system. This ETU
communicates with the interface boards
4 PBR
and supports up to 192 ports (24 interface
circuits
cards).
16 voice
mail ports
(analogue)
8 voice mail
ports
(digital)
Xen Axis
N/A
64 ports
128 ports
192 ports
8 slots
16 slots
24 slots
64
Station
Ports
120
Station
Ports
120
Station
Ports
56
Trunks
64
Trunks
64
Trunks
1 ETU
2 ETUs
32 PC
Telephony
Boards
16
Conference
Circuits
The Expansion KSU Controller controls
data transmission between the CPUB( ) U13 ETU and other ETUs installed in the
E64-U13 KSU where it is installed.
N/A
MDM-U13
Unit
The modem unit is mounted on the PCT
(M)-U13 Unit and is an option for the
PCT(S)-U13 ETU and the MIFM-U13
ETU.
1 per
PCT(S)U13 ETU
1 per
PCT(M)U13 ETU
1 per MIFMU13 ETU
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
EXP-U13 ETU
System Hardware Manual
N/A
1-5
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
Description
Basic
KSU
Basic + 1
Basic + 2
Expansion Expansion
KSU
KSUs
Xen Axis
Interface Trunk Units
BRT(4)-U13
ETU
This Basic Rate Interface unit provides
four circuits (eight voice channels) for
ISDN Basic Rate Interface, complying to
the ETSI standard.
4 ETUs
(32B)
8 ETUs
(64B)
8 ETUs
(64B)
2 ETUs
(16B)
2 ETUs
60
Trunks
2 ETUs
60
Trunks
1 ETU
10
Trunks
The maximum quantity allowed depends
on whether a PRT(1)-U13 ETU, COI( )U13 ETU, COID( )-U13 ETU, DID(4)-U13
ETU and/or TLI(2)-U13 ETU are installed.
These units share the total number of
trunk lines.
IPT(4)-U13 ETU This IP Gateway ETU is an optional
Variable
Interface that can combine various trunk
IP Gateway
and Tie Line calls into Gateway trunks.
Trunks
This ETU can be assigned as a two-port
TLI(2)-U13 or four-port DID(4)/COI(4)/
COID(4)-U13 ETU.
This ETU can be installed in KSU slots
that support the applicable assigned ETU.
IPT(8)-U13 ETU This IP Gateway ETU is an optional
Interface that can combine various trunk
and Tie Line calls into Gateway trunks.
This ETU can be assigned as a two-port
TLI(2)-U13,
four-port
DID(4)/COI(4)/
COID(4)-U13 or eight-port COI(8)/
COID(8)-U13 ETU.
This ETU can be installed in KSU slots
that support the applicable assigned ETU.
PRT(1)-U13
ETU
This Primary Rate Interface Unit provides
connection for one Primary Rate ISDN
circuit, providing up to 30 channels for use
as trunks in the system.
2 ETUs
60
Trunks
The maximum quantity allowed depends
on the number of COI(8)-U13 ETU,
COID(8)-U13 ETU, DID(4)-U13 ETU,
TLI(2)-U13 ETU and BRT(4)-U13 ETU
installed. These units share the total
number of trunk lines.
1-6
The Clock Unit provides synchronization
1 per
for ISDN Basic Rate and Primary Rate
system
connections and for the PHS system. The
with a
unit is piggybacked on the CPUB( ) -U13
BRT(4)-U13
ETU or B48-U13 KSU.
ETU,
PRT(1)-U13
ETU,
BSC-U13
ETU or
BSU(2)U13 ETU
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
CLKG-U13
UNIT
Introduction
May 2001
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
COI(8)-U13
ETU
COI(8)-U19
ETU
Basic
KSU
Basic + 1
Expansion
KSU
Basic + 2
Expansion
KSUs
Xen Axis
7 ETUs
8 ETUs
8 ETUs
2 ETUs
56
CO/PBX
lines
64
CO/PBX
lines
64
CO/PBX
lines
16
CO/PBX
lines
As per the COI (8)-U13 ETU, however
only supports the connection of four
outside trunk lines.
7 ETUs
28
CO/PBX
lines
15 ETUs
60
CO/PBX
lines
16 ETUs
64
CO/PBX
lines
4 ETUs
16
CO/PBX
lines
The Central Office Caller ID ETU detects
Caller ID signals from the central office
and sends caller identification to the CPU
ETU.
4 ETUs
8 ETUs
8 ETUs
2 ETUs
32
CO lines
64
CO lines
64
CO lines
16
CO lines
As per the COID(8)-U13 ETU, however
only supports the connection of four
outside trunk lines.
4 ETUs
16
CO Lines
8 ETUs
32
CO Lines
8 ETUs
32
CO Lines
2 ETUs
8
CO Lines
The Direct Inward Dialling Interface Unit
supports four DID lines. Each DID(4)-U13
ETU requires one interface slot position in
the KSU.
7 ETUs
15 ETUs
16 ETUs
4 ETUs
28 DID
Trunks
60 DID
Trunks
64 DID
Trunks
16 DID
Trunks
Description
This unit supports eight outside (CO/PBX)
lines and provides circuitry for ring
detection, holding, and dialling. Electrical
fuses (posistors) are built into this ETU.
Only loop start, DTMF Trunks are
supported.
The maximum quantity allowed depends
on the number of BRT(4)-U13 ETU,
PRT(1)-U13 ETU, COID( )-U13 ETU,
DID(4)-U13 ETU and/or TLI(2)-U13 ETU
installed. These units share the total
number of trunk lines.
COI(4)-U13
ETU
COI(4)-U19
ETU
COID(8)-U13
ETU
COID(8)-U19
ETU
This Unit supports eight outside (CO/PBX)
lines and provides circuitry for ring
detection, holding, and dialling. Electrical
fuses (posistors) are built into this ETU.
The maximum quantity allowed depends
on whether a BRT(4)-U13 ETU, PRI(1)U13 ETU, COI( )-U13 ETU, DID(4)-U13
ETU and/or TLI(2)-U13 ETU are installed.
These units share the total number of
trunk lines. This ETU provides loop start
service only.
COID(4)-U13
ETU
COID(4)-U19
ETU
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
DID(4)-U13
ETU
☛ Immediate, wink start, second dial tone,
and delay dial signalling can be
combined on this ETU.
The maximum quantity allowed depends
on whether a BRT(4)-U13 ETU, PRT(1)U13 ETU, COI(8)-U13 ETU, COID(8)-U13
ETU,
and/or TLI(2)-U13 ETU are
installed. These units share the total
number of trunk lines.
System Hardware Manual
1-7
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
Description
Basic
KSU
TLI(2)-U13 ETU The Tie Line Interface ETU supports the
termination and operation of up to two
E&M Tie lines (4-wire, type I and type V,
and 10/20 pps Dial Pulse or DTMF).
Immediate or wink start, delay start, or
second
dial
tone
signalling
is
accommodated.
Basic + 1
Basic + 2
Expansion Expansion
KSU
KSUs
Xen Axis
7 ETUs
15 ETUs
16 ETUs
4 ETUs
14 TLI
Circuits
30 TLI
Circuits
32 TLI
Circuits
8 TLI
Circuits
15 ETUs
15 ETUs
3 ETUs
120
extensions
120
extensions
32
extensions
14 ETUs
14 ETUs
3 ETUs
112
extensions
112
extensions
24
extensions
7 ETUs
15 ETUs
23 ETUs
5 ETUs
28
extensions
60
extensions
92
extensions
20
extensions
The maximum quantity allowed depends
on whether a BRT(4)-U13 ETU, PRT(1)U13 ETU, COI(8)-U13 ETU, COID( )-U13
ETU, DID(4)-U13 ETU are installed.
These units share the total number of
trunk lines.
Station Interface Units
8 ETUs
ESI(8)-U13 ETU The Electronic Station Interface ETU
contains eight circuits. Each circuit can
support any type of Attendant Console,
64
Multiline Terminal, or Single Line
extensions
Telephone Adaptor.
The maximum quantity allowed depends
on how many SLI( )-U13 ETUs, OPX(2)U13 ETUs, CNF(8)-U13 ETUs and
VDH2(8)-U13 ETUs are installed. This
unit shares the total number of extension
ports.
SLI(8)-U13 ETU The Single Line Interface ETU supports a
7 ETUs
maximum of eight Single Line Telephones
and/or voice mail ports.
This ETU
56
provides Ringing Signal Generator (RSG),
extensions
and Message Waiting (MW) LED voltage
to Single Line Telephones.
SLI(4)-U13 ETU As per the SLI(8)-U13 ETU, however
supports the connection of just four
analogue devices.
1-8
Introduction
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The maximum quantity allowed depends
on how many ESI( )-U13 ETUs, OPX(2)U13 ETUs, CNF(8)-U13 ETUs and
VDH2(8)-U13 ETUs are installed. This
unit shares the total number of extension
ports.
May 2001
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
OPX(2)U13
ETU
Description
Basic
KSU
The Off- Premise Extension ETU provides
7 ETUs
for the termination and operation of a
maximum of two analogue off-premise
14
extensions. Each ETU has a built-in ringer
extensions
unit. Up to 1600 ohms of loop resistance
(including the internal resistance of the
analogue device) is acceptable between
the OPX(2)-U13 ETU and the Single Line
Telephone or other analogue device
(release 2 or higher). The maximum
quantity allowed depends on how many
ESI(8)-U13 ETUs, SLI( )-U13 ETUs,
CNF(8)-U13 ETUs and VDH2(8)-U13
ETUs are installed. This unit shares the
total number of extension ports.
Basic + 1
Expansion
KSU
Basic + 2
Expansion
KSUs
Xen Axis
15 ETUs
23 ETUs
5 ETUs
30
extensions
46
extensions
10
extensions
Optional Electronic Telephone Units
ACD(8)-U13
ETU
The Automatic Call Distribution ETU is
installed in one of the S2~S7 interface
slots. It interfaces the Elite ACD Plus
Server with the Electra Elite KSU.
1 ETU
Slot S6 is recommended for installation.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Compatible with Release 4.0 Software or
higher.
VMS(2)-U13
ETU
This ETU is installed in one of the
interface slots. It has 2-channels of builtin Voice Mail.
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
VMS(4)-U13
ETU
This ETU is installed in one of the
interface slots. It has 4-channels of builtin Voice Mail.
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
VMS(8)-U13
ETU
This ETU is installed in one of the
interface slots. It has 8-channels of builtin Voice Mail.
2 ETUs
2 ETUs
2 ETUs
2 ETUs
FMS(2)-U13
ETU
This ETU is a two-port voice mail card
which installs inside the KSU. It utilises
Flash ROM memory to store around four
hours of messages.
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
FMS(4)-U13
ETU
This ETU is a four-port voice mail card
which installs inside the KSU. It utilises
Flash ROM memory to store around four
hours of messages.
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
4 ETUs
PBR( )-U13
ETU
The Push Button Receiver ETU detects
and translates DTMF tones generated by
Single Line Telephones, modems, or
facsimile machines. The PBR provides
four circuits.
1 ETU
☛ Four PBR circuits are built into the
CPUB( )-U13 ETU and MBD-U13
ETU.
System Hardware Manual
1-9
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
Description
Basic
KSU
Basic + 1
Basic + 2
Expansion Expansion
KSU
KSUs
Xen Axis
BSC-U13 ETU
This Base Station Controller Unit forms
part of the PHS Cordless Phone system
and controls and processes the call
information which flows between the CPU
and the BIU(2)-U13 ETU
1 ETU per
System
BIU(2)-U13
ETU
This Base Station Interface Unit forms part
of the PHS Cordless Phone system and
provides connection for two PHS Base
Stations (BS-ID or BS-ND).
3 ETUs
6 BS
3 ETUs
6 BS
3 ETUs
6 BS
2 ETUs
4 BS
BSU(2)-U13
ETU
This ETU combines the functions of the
BSC-U13 ETU and BIU(2)-U13 ETU onto
one option card i.e. it provides both PHS
base station control and an interface for
two PHS base stations. The BSU(2)-U13
ETU provides greater flexibility in the
system configuration and an increase in
the maximum number of base stations
which can be installed (release 2 or
higher).
7 ETUs
14 BS
8 ETUs
16 BS
8 ETUs
14 BS
5 ETUs
10 BS
ECR-U13 ETU The External Control Relay ETU provides
common audible tone signalling using
relay contacts for external ringing
equipment and an audible output for
external paging systems. Ten relays are
provided: four for External Tone Ringer
Control, one for Night Chime, three for
External Paging, and two for General
Purpose uses.
1 ETU
6 ETUs
9 ETUs
3 ETUs
48
extensions
72
extensions
24
extensions
15 ETUs
15 ETUs
4 ETUs
120
extensions
120
extensions
32
extensions
VDH2(8)-U13
ETU
The Voice Data Hub ETU allows
3 ETUs
integration of both Terminal and 10BaseT cables for local area network (LAN) into
24
the same cable (10Base-T and 10Base-2
extensions
are supported).
CAD-F(8)-13
ADP
VRS(4)-U13
ETU
1 - 10
8 ETUs
8 Port Core-line Hub Adaptor mounted
externally tot he KSU. This unit integrates
both ESI points and external LAN points
64
onto a common cable, which will then
extensions
terminate onto either a PCT(C)-U13 unit
or VDD-UA unit.
The Voice Recording Service ETU
provides voice recording messages for
internal stations, automatic answering on
incoming
outside
calls,
Delay
Announcement messages for ACD/UCD
by a voice recorded message, and
receives DTMF tones.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
When this ETU is installed, the FCE-U13
Unit is required.
2 ETUs
Introduction
May 2001
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
Description
Basic
KSU
DPH(4)-U13
ETU
The Doorphone interface ETU allows four
DP-D-1D Doorphones to be connected.
Two simultaneous calls are allowed, and
four Door Lock Release relays are
provided.
1 ETU
CNF(8)-U13
ETU
The Multiline Conference Card allows up
to eight parties to participate in a
conference call, made up of any
combination of internal and external
parties. The card may also be set up to
provide two four-party conferences. DSP
based amplification provides a higher
quality conference call (release 2 or
higher). This card shares the total number
of extension ports.
2 ETUs
Basic + 1
Expansion
KSU
Basic + 2
Expansion
KSUs
Xen Axis
Terminals
DTU-8-1A (WH) This digital Multiline Terminal has eight
programmable line keys (each with a twoTEL
color LED), built-in speakerphone, a Large
LED to indicate incoming calls and
messages, headset jack, and compatibility
with ADA-UA, APR-UA, CTA-UA, CTU( )UA, HFU-UA, and VDD-UA Units.
63
119
119
31
DTU-8D-1A
These digital Multiline Terminal has 8
(WH)/(BK) TEL programmable line keys (each with a twocolor LED), a built-in speakerphone, a
Large LED to indicate incoming calls and
messages, headset jack, and compatibility
with ADA-UA, APR-UA, CTA-UA, CTU( )UA, HFU-UA, and VDD-UA Units.
64
120
120
32
64
120
120
32
This terminal also has a 24-character, 3line adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD), and provides four softkeys.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
DTU-16D-1A These digital Multiline Terminals are
(WH)/(BK) TEL equipped with 16 programmable line keys
(each with a two-color LED), a built-in
speakerphone, a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, headset
jack, and compatibility with ADA-UA,
APR-UA, CTA-UA, CTU( )-UA, HFU-UA,
and VDD-UA Units.
This terminal also has a 24-character, 3line, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD).
The DTU-16D-1 (WH) TEL provides four
softkeys.
System Hardware Manual
1 - 11
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
Description
DTU-32D-1A This digital Multiline Terminal is equipped
(WH)/(BK) TEL with 32 programmable line keys (each
with a two-color LED), a built-in
speakerphone, a Large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages, headset
jack, and compatibility with ADA-UA,
APR-UA, CTA-UA, CTU( )-UA, HFU-UA,
and VDD-UA Units.
Basic
KSU
64
Basic + 1
Basic + 2
Expansion Expansion
KSU
KSUs
Xen Axis
120
120
32
This terminal has a 24-character, 3-line,
adjustable Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
The DTU-32D-1 (WH) TEL provides four
softkeys.
DCU-60-1A
(WH)/(BK)
CONSOLE
This Attendant Console is equipped with
60 programmable line keys (each with two
LEDs). Twelve keys can be programmed
as Feature Access keys and 48 keys can
be programmed as Direct Station
Selection or outside line keys.
4
DP-D-1DA
This Doorphone may be used when
DPH(4)-U13 ETU is installed.
4
ETW-8E-1A
(SW) TEL
This terminal is a fully modular instrument
with tilt stand, eight Flexible Line keys
(each with two-color LED), eight function
keys,
built-in
speakerphone,
ADA
compatibility, and a large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages.
63
119
119
31
ETW-16C-1A
(SW) TEL
This terminal is a fully modular instrument
with tilt stand, 16 Flexible Line keys (each
with two-color LED), eight function keys,
built-in speakerphone, ADA compatibility,
and a large LED to indicate incoming calls
and messages.
64
120
120
32
64
120
120
32
ETW-16D-1A
(SW) TEL
This terminal is a fully modular instrument
with tilt stand, 16 Flexible Line keys (each
with two-color LED), eight function keys,
20 programmable One-Touch keys with
red LEDs, built-in speakerphone, ADA
compatibility, and a large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
This terminal has a 16-character by 2-line
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
This terminal has a 16-character by 2-line
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
1 - 12
Introduction
May 2001
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
ETW-24S-1A
(SW) TEL
Description
This terminal is a fully modular instrument
with tilt stand, 24 Flexible Line keys (each
with two-color LED), eight function keys,
12 programmable One-Touch keys, dualpath ability, built-in speakerphone, ADA
compatibility, and a large LED to indicate
incoming calls and messages.
Basic
KSU
Basic + 1
Expansion
KSU
Basic + 2
Expansion
KSUs
Xen Axis
64
120
120
32
This terminal has a 16-character by 2-line
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
EDW-48-2A
(SW)
CONSOLE
This console has a tilt stand, 48
programmable keys with dual LEDs
(green and red) and 12 function keys with
red LED. All 48 keys can be assigned as
DSS keys, outside line keys, or function
keys.
4
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Adaptors and Optional Units
ACA-UA Unit
This 24 volt, 400 mA AC Adaptor unit One per
connects to one of the following units: Multiline
APR-UA Unit, CTA-UA Unit, or HFU-UA Terminal as
Unit.
required
ADA-UA Unit
This Ancillary Device Adaptor provides the
DTU-type
Multiline
Terminal
with
connection for a recording device.
64
120
120
32
ADA(1)-WA
(SW) Unit
This Ancillary Device Adaptor provides the
ETW-type
Multiline
Terminal
with
connection for headset, or audio recorder.
64
120
120
32
APR-UA Unit
When this analogue Port Ringer Adaptor
is used, an additional Single Line
Telephone or a modem can be connected
to a DTU-type Multiline Terminal.
64
120
120
32
CTA-UA Unit
TAPI (Microsoft Telephony Application 32 Units
Programming Interface) Adaptor allows an (1 per MLT)
DTU-type Multiline Terminal to be
connected to a PC.
CTU(S)-UA Unit This TAPI Adaptor allows a DTU-type 32 Units
Multiline Terminal to be connected to a PC
Max.
via a high performance USB interface (1 per MLT)
(Universal Serial Bus). The MLT connects
to an ESI port in the KSU.
CTU(C)-UA Unit This TAPI Adaptor allows a DTU-type 32 Units
Multiline Terminal to be connected to a PC
Max.
via a high performance USB interface (1 per MLT)
(Universal Serial Bus) and a 10 Base-T
LAN port. The MLT connects to a Telamux
port (VDH2(8)-U13 ETU) in the KSU.
System Hardware Manual
1 - 13
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Equipment
Name
HFU-UA (WH)
Unit
Description
Basic
KSU
This Handsfree Unit is an optional unit that
provides
full-duplex
handsfree
communication on any DTU-type Multiline
Terminal.
64
Basic + 1
Basic + 2
Expansion Expansion
KSU
KSUs
Xen Axis
120
120
32
24
48
72
24
64
120
120
32
64
120
120
32
This unit comes with the handsfree
Adaptor and an external microphone.
PCT(C)-U13
Unit
The NEC PC Telephony Board (TAPI) with
a Telamux interface. The VDD-UA Unit is
built into the PCT(C)-U13 unit so that this
unit can connect directly to the VDH2(8)U13 ETU.
32
PCT(S)-U13
Unit
The NEC PC Telephony Board (TAPI)
without a modem.
32
This board can be installed on the ISA bus
on any IBM-compatible PC.
PCT(M)-U13
Unit
The NEC PC Telephony Board (TAPI)
without a modem.
32
This board can be installed on the ISA bus
on any IBM-compatible PC.
SLT(1)-U13
ADP
The Single Line Telephone Adaptor
provides an interface for Single Line
Telephones and other similar devices from
an ESI ETU channel.
7
This Adaptor can be connected to any ESI
port.
VDD-UA Unit
The Telamux Interface Adaptor provides
LAN split for digital terminals when the
VDH2(8)-U13 ETU is used. This unit is
used to incorporate LAN and telephone
lines into one cable.
WMU-UA Unit
This Wall Mount Unit is used to mount any
DTU-type Multiline Terminal to the wall.
This unit connects to the back side of the
Multiline Terminal.
This unit is required when an APR-UA
Unit, CTA-UA Unit, HFU-UA (WH) Unit, or
a VDD-UA Unit is installed.
WMU-W Unit
This universal Wall Mount Unit is used to
mount any ETW-type Multiline Terminal to
the wall.
Software
MAT S/W
(Technician)
1 - 14
Maintenance Access Terminal Software
for Technician.
N/A
Introduction
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
This Adaptor can be installed on any DTUtype Multiline Terminal.
May 2001
Table 1-1 Equipment List (Continued)
Xen Master
Description
CAT S/W
(End User)
Client Administration Terminal Software
for End User.
Basic
KSU
Basic + 1
Expansion
KSU
Basic + 2
Expansion
KSUs
Xen Axis
N/A
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Equipment
Name
System Hardware Manual
1 - 15
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1 - 16
Introduction
System Specifications
Chapter 2
SECTION 1
GENERAL
INFORMATION
This chapter provides the technician with detailed specifications for the Xen
Master and Xen Axis systems. The technician should review this
information carefully before installing the systems.
SECTION 2
SYSTEM BLOCK
DIAGRAM
Figure 2-1 System Block Diagram represents an installed system. This
diagram shows the ETUs that can be installed in the KSU and the number
of channels that are supported when the ETU is installed. Table 2-1 List of
Abbreviations lists abbreviations that are used in the diagram.
Table 2-1 List of Abbreviations
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Abbreviation
AMP
Amplifier
APR
Analogue Port Ringer
BSC
Base Station Controller (PHS)
BIU
Base Station Interface Unit (PHS)
BSU
Base Station Controller and Interface (PHS)
BRT
Basic Rate Trunk Interface (ISDN)
CNF
Conference
COI
Central Office Interface
COID
Central Office Caller ID
COM
Communication
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CTA
Computer Telephony Adapter
CTI
Computer Telephony Integration
CTU
Computer Telephony Adapter with USB port
DID
Direct Inward Dialling
DPH
Door Phone
DTI
Digital Trunk Interface
ECR
External Control Relay
ESI
Electronic Station Interface
HDLC
System Hardware Manual
Description
High Level Data Link Control
2 - 17
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Table 2-1 List of Abbreviations (Continued)
Abbreviation
Description
HFU
Handsfree Unit
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
LAN
Local Area Network
MIC
Microphone
MIF
Multipurpose Interface
MOH
Music On Hold
OPX
Off-Premise Extension
PBR
Push Button Receiver
PC
PCM
Personal Computer
Pulse Code Modulation
PCT (C)
PC Telephony Board (Coreline Interface)
PCT (S)
PC Telephony Board (without Modem)
PKG
Package
PRI
Primary Rate Trunk Interface (ISDN)
SLI
Single Line interface
SLT
Single Line Telephone
SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording
SPK
Speaker
TLI
Tie Line Interface
VDD
Voice Data Digital Adapter
VDH
Voice Data Hub
VM
Voice Mail
Built-In Voice Mail System Interface
VRS
Voice Recording Service
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
VMS
2 - 18
System Specifications
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
May 2001
Figure 2-1 System Block Diagram
System Hardware Manual
2 - 19
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
SECTION 3
MAXIMUM SYSTEM
CAPACITIES
Xen Master & Xen Axis
The maximum capacities available in the Xen System are shown in Table 22 Maximum System Capacities.
Table 2-2 Maximum System Capacities
Basic KSU
Basic +1
Expansion
KSU
Basic +2
Expansion
KSUs
Xen
Axis
ADA-UA Unit
64
120
120
32
APR-UA Unit
64
120
120
32
BIU(2)-U13 ETU
3
3
3
2
BRT(4)-U13 ETU
4
8
8
2
BSC-U13 ETU
1
1
1
1
BSU(2)-U13 ETU
7
8
8
5
CAD-F(8)-13 ADP
8
15
15
4
CNF(8)-U13 ETU
2
2
2
2
COI(4)-U13 ETU
7
15
16
4
COI(8)-U13 ETU
7
8
8
2
COID(4)-U13 ETU
7
15
16
2
COID(8)-U13 ETU
4
8
8
2
CPUB( )-U13 ETU
1
1
1
N/A
CTA-UA Unit
32
32
32
32
CTU( )-UA ETU
32
32
32
32
DID(4)-U13 ETU
7
15
16
4
DPH(4)-U13 ETU
1
1
1
1
ECR-U13 ETU
1
1
1
1
ESI(8)-U13 ETU
8
15
15
3
EXP-U13 ETU
0
1
2
N/A
FMS(2)-U13 ETU
4
4
4
4
FMS(4)-U13 ETU
4
4
4
4
HFU-UA Unit
64
120
120
32
IPT(4)-U13 ETU
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
IPT(8)-U13 ETU
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
MIFA-U13 Unit
1
1
1
N/A
MIFM-U13 Unit
1
1
1
1
OPX(2)-U13 ETU
7
15
23
5
PBR( )-U13 ETU
1
1
1
1
Item
2 - 20
System Specifications
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Xen Master
May 2001
Table 2-2 Maximum System Capacities (Continued)
Xen Master
Basic KSU
Basic +1
Expansion
KSU
Basic +2
Expansion
KSUs
Xen
Axis
PCT(C) -U13 Unit
32
32
32
32
PCT(M)-U13 Unit
32
32
32
2
PCT(S) -U13 Unit
32
32
32
32
PRI(1)-U13 ETU
2
2
2
3
SLI(4)-U13 ETU
7
15
23
5
SLI(8)-U13 ETU
7
14
14
24
SLT(1)-U13 ADP
7
7
7
7
TLI(2)-U13 ETU
7
15
16
4
VDD-UA Unit
64
120
120
32
VDH2(8)-U13 ETU
3
6
9
3
VMS(2)-U13 ETU
4
4
4
4
VMS(4)-U13 ETU
4
4
4
4
VMS(8)-U13 ETU
2
2
2
2
VRS(4)-U13 ETU
2
2
2
32
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Item
System Hardware Manual
2 - 21
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
SECTION 4
SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.1
Cabling Requirements and Specifications
The KSU is connected with each of the Multiline Terminals and
Single Line Telephones by a separate twisted 1-pair cable or 2-pair
cable (only for Multiline Terminals). Refer to Table 2-3 Multiline
Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length, Table 2-4 Cable
Connection between an Analogue Interface and a Single Line
Telephone, and Table 2-5 Cabling Requirements.
Table 2-3 Multiline Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length
Terminal or Adapter
Maximum
Loop
Resistance
(Ohms)
Maximum
Metres by
Twisted 1-Pair
Cable
Maximum
Metres by
Twisted 2-Pair
Cable
24 AWG
24 AWG
DTU-8-1 (WH) TEL
35
180
300
DTU-16D-1 (WH) TEL
26
135
270
DTU-32D-1 (WH) TEL
21
110
215
DCU-60-1 (WH) Console
N/A
300
300
SLT(1)-U13 ADP
35
180
300
ETW-8-1 (SW) TEL
36
180
300
ETW-16C-1 (SW) TEL
26
135
270
ETW-16D-1 (SW) TEL
21
110
215
ETW-24S-1 (SW) TEL
26
135
270
EDW-48-2 (SW) Console
with AC Adapter
N/A
300
300
Note 1: When installing an Attendant Console, an AC Adapter is required.
Note 2: The length for the specified SLT Adapter is the length between
the SLT Adapter and the ESI.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Note 3: ETW and EDW-type terminals are not available in New Zealand.
2 - 22
System Specifications
May 2001
Table 2-4 Cable Connection between an Analogue Interface and a Single Line
Telephone
Cable
Maximum Loop
Resistance
(ohms)
Typical Distance
using Twisted 1Pair 24AWG
APR-UA ADP
Twisted Pair
600
200m
SLT(1)-U13 ADP
Twisted Pair
600
200m
SLI( )-U13 ETU
Twisted Pair
950
300m
OPX(2)-U13 ETU
Twisted Pair
1800
6km
Interface
Equipment
Note 1: Mixing digital and analogue ports though the same 25-pair cable
runs is not recommended.
Note 2: The Maximum Loop Resistance includes the internal resistance
of the SLT device.
Table 2-5 Cabling Requirements
Connected Equipment
Music on Hold and Background Music
Sources
Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable
External Amplifier
Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable
4.2
Cabling Precautions
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
4.2.1
System Hardware Manual
Cable
Cable Placement
When selecting cables and Main Distribution Frame
(MDF), future expansion or assignment changes should
be given due consideration. Avoid running cables in the
following places:
✆
A place exposed to wind or rain.
✆
A place near heat radiating equipment or where the
quality of station cable covering could be affected by
gases and chemicals.
✆
An unstable place subject to vibration.
✆
Environmental Conditions Temperatures:
Operating:
0°C ~ 40°C
Recommended Long Term:
10°C ~ 32.2°C
Humidity Operating:
10% ~ 90%
noncondensing
2 - 23
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.3
Power Requirements
4.3.1
Power Supply Inputs
The AC input requirements for the Xen system are listed
below.
✆
AC Input (P64-U13 PSU):
240 Vac +10% / -15%
50 Hz ± 2 Hz
Single Phase
10A circuit
#
4.3.2
A dedicated outlet, separately fused and grounded, is
required.
Power Supply Consumption
The power consumption for the Xen system is listed in
Table 2-6 Power Consumption.
Table 2-6 Power Consumption
System
Xen Master
KSU
B64-U13 KSU
B64-U13 KSU +
1 x E64-U13 KSU
B64-U13 KSU +
2 x E64-U13 KSU
Xen Axis
B48( )-U13 KSU
4.3.3
Maximum
RMS
Current
Watts Used
(Idle)
Watts Used
(Maximum)
1.3 A
120
320
2.0 A
240
460
2.9 A
360
690
1.0 A
120
230
Fuse Replacement
When replacing fuses, refer to the specifications in Table
2-7 Fuse Replacement.
Unit
Fuse
Number
Specifications
Description
Dimensions
P64-U13 PSU
F1
250V, 2.5A
AC Input
5 x 20 mm
F101
125V, 10A
Battery Input
5 x 20 mm
All fuses are normal blow glass tube.
CAUTION: Do not use slow blow fuses. Replace with a fuse of the same type and
rating.
2 - 24
System Specifications
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Table 2-7 Fuse Replacement
May 2001
4.4
Outside Line Types
The following outside lines can be used with the Xen system.
✆ 2-wire, Ring In, Loop Out Trunks (Dial Pulse or DTMF).
(Dial Pulse not available in New Zealand)
✆ 2-wire, DID Lines (Dial Pulse or DTMF).
(Analogue DID is not available in New Zealand)
✆ 4-wire, E&M Tie Lines (Type I or V, Dial Pulse, or DTMF)
✆ ISDN Basic Rate Trunks (ETSI)
✆ ISDN Primary Rate Trunks (ETSI)
4.5
Transmission, Network, and Control Specifications
4.5.1
Transmission
✆
Data Length:
From Multiline Terminal to ESI(8)-U13 Unit: 23 bits
From ESI(8)-U13 Unit to Multiline Terminal: 23 bits
✆
Data Transmission Rates:
Between ESI(8)-U13 ETU and
Multiline Terminal:
84K bps
(voice and signalling)
Scanning Time for each Multiline Terminal: 32 ms
Network
Time Division Multiplexing allows transmission of a
number of separate data, voice and/or video
simultaneously over one communications medium. The
information below indicates the specifications the Xen
system uses for switching, clock, data bus, timeframe:
✆
TDM Switching:
PCM (A Law)
✆
TDM Clock:
2.048 MHz
✆
TDM Data Bus:
8 bit
✆
TDM Timeframe: 125 µs
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
4.5.2
System Hardware Manual
2 - 25
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.5.4
Control
This section indicates the speed and capacities of the
control.
✆
Control:
✆
Central Processor: 32-bit microprocessor
✆
Clock:
25 MHz
✆
Interface ETU:
8-bit or 16-bit microprocessor
✆
Optional ETUs:
16-bit or 32-bit microprocessor
✆
Multiline Terminal: 8-bit microprocessor
✆
Attendant Console: 4-bit microprocessor
✆
SLT Adapter:
4-bit microprocessor
Telephone
The voltage, current and ring signal information for the Xen
Multiline Terminals, Single Line Telephone equipment, and
APR units are listed below.
✆
2 - 26
Stored program with distributed
processing
Multiline Terminal
Voltage:
-11 ~ -26 Vdc
Maximum Current:
250 mA
✆
Single Line Telephone
✆
Standard 2500 Set:
500 type network
✆
Nominal Current:
35 mA
✆
Ring Signal:
56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz
SLT(1)-U13 ADP
✆
Standard 2500 Set:
500 type network
✆
Nominal Current:
30 mA
✆
Ring Signal:
56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz APRUA Unit
✆
Standard 2500 Set:
500 type network
✆
Nominal Current:
30 mA
✆
Ring Signal:
56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz
System Specifications
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
4.5.3
May 2001
4.6
Dialling Specifications
4.6.1
Dial Pulse Address Signalling
Dial Pulse Signalling is a type of address signalling that
uses dial pulses (regular momentary interruptions) to
signal the equipment. In the Xen system, the following Dial
Pulse specifications are used.
✆
Pulse Rate:
10 ± 0.5 pps/20 ± 1.0 pps
✆
Percent Break:
60 ±ms. ~ 830 ms.
✆
Interdigit Interval:
10 pps/20 pps 770 ms. ~ 830
ms.
#
4.6.2
Dial Pulse is not allowed in New Zealand.
Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Address Signalling
DTMF signalling describes push button or Touchtone
Dialling. When a key on a telephone is pushed, two tones
(one high frequency and one low frequency) are provided.
In the Xen system, the following DTMF specifications
are used.
Table 2-8 DTMF Specifications
Frequency Deviation
Less than ±1.0%
Signal Level
Nominal level per frequency: -6 ~ -4
dBm
Minimum level per frequency
Low Group: -10 dBm
High Group: -8 dBm
Maximum level per frequency
0 dBm
Rise Time
Within 5 ms.
Duration of Dual Frequency
Signal
110 ms. default/60 ms. minimum
Interdigital Time: 80 ms. default/70 ms.
minimum
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Frequencies
Two sinusoidal frequencies are
provided, one from the high frequency
group and one from the low frequency
group.
System Hardware Manual
2 - 27
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Table 2-9 DTMF Address Signalling
Normal High Group Frequencies (Hz)
Nominal Low Group
Frequencies (Hz)
4.7
1209
1336
1477
697
1
2
3
770
4
5
6
852
7
8
9
941
*
0
#
Battery Backup
The Xen Master system has two battery backup functions: one for
system backup and one for memory backup.
4.7.1
System Backup
The system operation is backed up by rechargeable
batteries in the event that the mains power fails. Two levels
of backup are provided.
1.
Internal Batteries: These comes as standard with the
B64-U13 KSU, E64-U13 KSU and B48-U13 KSU and
will support all of the system functions for
approximately 30 minutes.
Table 2-10 Internal Backup Battery Specifications
Cabinet
Battery
Specifications
Dimensions
(mm)
B64-U13 KSU
12V, 2.6AH
178(L)x34(W)x60(H)
E64-U13 KSU
Sealed Lead Acid
5mm Spade Terminals
Quantity
2
Replacement
Time
2.5 Years
B48-U13 KSU
External Batteries: These are optional and mount into
the External Battery Box. These batteries will support
all of the system functions for approximately 2 hours.
#
External devices connected to the Xen System that
require an AC Adapter to operate will cease to function during a mains power failure unless they are connected to their own backup power source.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2.
2 - 28
System Specifications
May 2001
Table 2-11 External Backup Battery Requirements
Battery
Capacity (Ah)
Backup Duration
Xen Axis
Xen Master
Xen Master
Xen Master
1 Cabinet
2 CabinetS
3 Cabinets
(Max. 1.0A, 230W) (Max. 1.3A, 320W) (Max. 2.0A, 460W) (Max. 2.9A, 690W)
1 hour
4.0
5.2
6.8
8.8
2 hours
8.0
10.4
13.5
17.6
3 hours
12.0
15.6
20.3
26.4
4 hours
16.0
20.8
27.0
35.2
5 hours
20.0
26.0
33.8
43.9
6 hours
24.0
31.2
40.6
52.7
7 hours
28.0
26.4
47.3
61.5
8 hours
32.0
41.6
54.1
70.3
9 hours
36.0
46.8
60.8
79.1
10 hours
40.0
52.0
67.6
87.9
Note 1: The system requires a 24Vdc battery feed and so two 12 Vdc batteries for the quoted capacity
will be required.
Note 2: The figures are based on a fully located system operating throughout the power loss. Backup
durations for an idle system will be approximately twice the quoted figures.
Note 3: Use only Sealed Lead Acid type batteries and always install batteries in accordance with the
relevant regulations.
4.7.2
Memory Backup
A backup battery is equipped on several of the ETU’s. This
battery retains the system’s memory in the event of an
extended mains power failure where the system backup
batteries have also expired or where the ETU has been
removed from the system.
Table 2-12 ETU Battery Backup Specifications
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
ETU
Battery
Specifications
Quantity
Approx.
Backup Time
Replacement
Time
CPUB( )-U13 ETU
3.7V, 60mAH Ni-Cd
1
21 days
2 Years
MBD-U13 UNIT
3.7V, 60mAH Ni-Cd
1
21 days
2 Years
MIFM-U13 ETU
3.7V, 60mAH Ni-Cd
1
21 days
2 Years
MIFA-U13 ETU
3.7V, 60mAH Ni-Cd
1
21 days
2 Years
System Hardware Manual
2 - 29
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.8
Weights and Dimensions
Table 2-13 Weights and Dimensions indicates the shipping weight,
height, width, and depth of each of the Xen KSUs, ETUs, Multiline
Terminals and Adapters.
Table 2-13 Weights and Dimensions
2 - 30
Shipping Weight
Height
Width
Depth
ACA-UA Unit
638 g
86 mm
107 mm
133 mm
ADA-UA Unit
65 g
29 mm
59 mm
99 mm
APR-UA Unit
122 g
66 mm
59 mm
121 mm
B48-U13 KSU
13063 g
340 mm
350 mm
228 mm
B64-U13 KSU
13063 g
333 mm
348 mm
213 mm
BIU(2)-13 ETU
414 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
BRT(4)-U13 ETU
414 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
BSC-U13 ETU
414 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
BSU(2)-U13 ETU
370 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
CAD-F(8)-13 ADP
414 g
110 mm
320 mm
155 mm
CNF(8)-U13 ETU
325 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
COI(8)-U13/U19 ETU
471 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
COID(8)-U13/U19 ETU
490 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
CPUB( )-U13 ETU
380 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
CTA-UA Unit
122 g
66 mm
59 mm
121 mm
DCU-60-1(WH) Console
1503 g
92 mm
223 mm
270 mm
DID(4)-U13 ETU
439 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
DPH(4)-U13 ETU
343 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
DTU-16D-1A (WH) TEL
1233 g
123 mm
197 mm
235 mm
DTU-32D-1A (WH) TEL
1361 g
123 mm
220 mm
235 mm
DTU-8-1A (WH) TEL
1163 g
123 mm
197 mm
235 mm
DTU-8D-1A(WH) TEL
1163 g
123 mm
197 mm
235 mm
E64-U13 KSU
13063 g
333 mm
348 mm
213 mm
ECR-U13 ETU
344 g
40 mm
140 mm
180 mm
EDW-48-2A (SW) TEL
1389 g
69 mm
175 mm
223 mm
ESI(8)-U13 ETU
411 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
ETW-16C-1A (SW) TEL
992 g
101mm
175 mm
223 mm
ETW-16D-1A (SW) TEL
1106 g
101mm
205 mm
223 mm
ETW-24S-1A (SW) TEL
1106 g
101mm
205 mm
223 mm
ETW-8E-1A (SW) TEL
907 g
101mm
175 mm
223 mm
System Specifications
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Unit
May 2001
Table 2-13 Weights and Dimensions (Continued)
Unit
Shipping Weight
Height
Width
Depth
EXP-UA 13 ETU
414 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
HFU-UA (WH) Unit
201 g
86 mm
107 mm
133 mm
MIFA-U13 ETU
343 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
MIFM-U13 ETU
349 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
OPX(2)-U13 ETU
410 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
PBR( )-U13 ETU
303 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
PRI(1)-U13 ETU
303 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
SLI(4)-U13 ETU
360 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
SLI(8)-U13 ETU
400 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
SLT(1)-U13 ADP
255 g
45 mm
70 mm
120 mm
TLI(2)-U13 ETU
391 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
VDD-UA Unit
352 g
63 mm
224mm
275 mm
VDH2(8)-U13 ETU
522 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
VMS(2/4/8)-U13 ETU
2903 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
VRS(4)-U13 ETU
340 g
48 mm
290 mm
214 mm
WMU-UA Unit
301 g
104 mm
151 mm
180 mm
Note :
Shipping weight includes the shipping carton and documentation.
4.9
External Equipment Interface
Input signal levels, impedance, contact ratings, and connector types
are listed for externally connected equipment.
4.9.1
Music on Hold/Station Background Music
Table 2-14 Music on Hold/Station Background Music
4.9.2
Auxiliary Input
0.6V PPS Signal Level
Input Impedance
600 Ω
Music for Station BGM and MOH via COI( )-U13/U19 ETU
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Table 5-15 Music for Station BGM and MOH via COI( )U13/U19 ETU
System Hardware Manual
Auxiliary Input
0.6 V PPS Signal Level
Input Impedance
600 Ω
2 - 31
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.9.3
External Paging (Audio)
Table 5-16 External Paging (Audio)
4.9.4
Output Power
-10 dBm Signal Level
Output Impedance
600 Ω
Relay Contact Rating
500 mA, 24 Vdc
External Tone Ringer/Night Chime Output
Table 5-17 External Tone Ringer/Night Chime Output
4.9.5
Output Power
-10 dBm
Output Impedance
600 Ω
Relay Contact Rating
500 mA, 24 Vdc
SMDR Output
Table 5-18 SMDR Output
Female Connector (System
Output)
4.9.6
Standard RS-232C
(straight)
PC Connection
Table 5-19 PC Connection
Female Connector (System
Output)
4.9.7
Standard RS-232C
(straight)
ACD/MIS Connector
Table 5-20 ACD/MIS Connector
Female Connector (System
Output)
4.9.8
Standard RS-232C
(straight)
Relay Contact
Table 5-21 Relay Contact
500 mA, 24 Vdc
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
All Relay Contact Ratings
2 - 32
System Specifications
May 2001
4.10
Audible and Visual Indications
The tables in this section provide the audible and visual indications
used in the Xen systems.
4.10.1 Tone Patterns
Tones are used in the Xen systems to inform the station
user of various functions of the systems such as, dial tone,
busy tone, or ringback tone. Table 2-22 Tone Patterns lists
the frequency and the pattern for the tones used in the
Xen system.
4.10.2
LED Flash Patterns
The Xen system provides 2-color LEDs. Green is used
primarily for I-Use conditions and for outside calls. Red is
used primarily for Other Use conditions and internal calls.
Refer to.
Table 2-22 Tone Patterns
System Tone
(Fixed)
Frequency (Hz)
(Fixed)
Cadence
(Default)
425
80 IPM
Cycle
0.375
Busy Tone (Aust.)
0.375
60 IPM
440
0.25 sec On
0.25 sec Off
0.25 sec On
1.25 sec Off
2400
16 Hz Mod.
Continuous
450/350
Continuous
425
25 Hz Mod.
0.4 sec On
0.2 sec Off
0.4 sec On
2.0 sec Off
LCR Dial Tone
400
Continuous
Reorder Tone
425
2.5 sec On
0.5 sec Off
Second Dial Tone
Howler Tone
Internal Dial Tone
Internal Ringback Tone
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
.50
440
20 Hz Mod.
Call Waiting Tone
.50
Service Set Tone
800
Continuous
Busy Tone (NZ)
400
60 IPM
.25
.25
1.25
.25
0.4
0.4
2.0
.02
2.5
.05
0.5
0.5
NV Tone (NZ)
System Hardware Manual
400
0.075/0.1
0.075/0.1
0.075/0.1
0.075/0.4
0.075
0.075
0.1
0.4
2 - 33
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Table 2-22 Tone Patterns (Continued)
System Tone
(Fixed)
Frequency (Hz)
(Fixed)
Cadence
(Default)
440
240 IPM
Cycle
.125
Special Dial Tone
.125
Tone Burst 1 Tone
800
Continuous
Tone Burst 2 Tone
400
Continuous
425
25 Hz Mod
0.4 sec On
0.2 sec Off
0.4 sec On
2.0 sec Off
Tie/DID Ringback Tone
Camp-On Tone
Call Alert Notification
Attendant Tone Override
440
Continuous
DIT Alert Tone
480/620
Continuous
Call Forward Alert Tone
Call Forward
Configuration Tone
350/440
1 sec
1 sec
0.4
0.4
.02
2.0
0.7 sec
0.5 sec
.25 sec ON x 2~3 bursts
Table 2-23 Multiline Terminal Flash Patterns
W
Condition
I-Use
Busy
Incoming Call
I-Hold
Call Hold
Hold Recall
Transfer Recall
Live Monitoring Mode
Microphone ON
W
ICM
I-Use
ICM Incoming Call
Voice Over Broker
Incoming Internal Call
Incoming Outside Call
Large LED
Message from Attendant
Voice Mail Message
2 - 34
Colour
Flash Patterns
Green
Red
Red
Green
Red
Green
Green
Green
Red
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
LED
Red
Red
Red
Red
Green
Green
Red
System Specifications
May 2001
Table 2-23 Multiline Terminal Flash Patterns (Continued)
P
ON
System Data Entry
Red
Red
R
Conference in Progress/Barge In
All Conference Circuits Used
Hold Conference Call
ICM Call Hold
SPD Confirmation
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
O
Incoming Trunk
Exclusive Hold
User Ringing Line Preference
Voice Over with Broker’s Call
Red
Green
Red
Green
T
Callback Set
Auto Repeat Set
ON (to set function)
Call FWD - All Calls Set
Red
Red
Red
Red
Q
Other Tenant CO Line Key Seized
Exclusive Hold
Green
Green
Use, Hold
DND, Call FWD-All Calls Set
Special Mode (while pressing
or going off-line)
Red
Red
Red
W
BLF or
DSS Key
T
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0 sec.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
0
System Hardware Manual
2 - 35
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 36
System Specifications
Hardware Requirements
Chapter 3
The technician should be familiar with the Xen System before attempting to
install it. Review this chapter carefully.
SECTION 2
PROGRAMMING
STATIONS
Two programming positions are available in the Xen System. Station
equipment that is connected to the first ESI(8)-U13 ETU is automatically set
as programming positions and must be a display Multiline Terminal.
SECTION 3
ATTENDANT STATIONS
An unlimited number of Attendant positions can be assigned in the Xen
System. An Attendant Position can have one to four DCU-60-1A (WH)
Consoles attached. Each Attendant Console must be supported by an
ESI(8)-U13 ETU. A maximum of four Attendant Consoles can be installed
in each Xen System.
SECTION 4
PROGRAMMING FROM
A PC
Xen Systems can be programmed from a personal computer. The Menu
Programming option available with PC Programming allows the technician/
end-user easy access to all information that can be programmed on the Xen
System. The PC must be a Pentium or higher and have Windows 95 or
higher to be compatible with the Maintenance Access Terminal (MAT)
Software.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
SECTION 1
GENERAL
INFORMATION
System Hardware Manual
3 - 37
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
SECTION 5
PROGRAMMING FROM
A MULTILINE TERMINAL
SECTION 6
XEN MASTER REMOTE
PC PROGRAMMING
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Programming for the Xen System is accomplished through PC
Programming. As an added convenience, programming for the system can
be accomplished using Multiline Terminals with LCD. Multiline Terminal
programming should be used after the system is installed and any initial
assignments are made. Using the Multiline Terminal provides a quick way to
access system data and make changes to data items. To program from a
Multiline Terminal one of the following terminals is required.
✆
DTU-8D-1A(WH) TEL
✆
DTU-16D-1A(WH) TEL
✆
DTU-32D-1A(WH) TEL
✆
ETW-16C-1A(SW) TEL
✆
ETW-16D-1A(SW) TEL
✆
ETW-24S-1A(SW) TEL
#
ETW-type TEL are not available in New Zealand.
The Xen System can be programmed from a remote location using a
personal computer.
6.1
Remote Programming
To provide remote programming the following hardware is required:
Analogue CO Trunk or system SLT Port (not needed if the
optional internal modem is used)
✆
A straight RS-232C cable and adaptor (provided with the
MIFM-U13 ETU) cable to connect a locally provided modem
(not needed if the optional internal modem is used)
✆
MIFM-U13 ETU installed in the Xen System
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
✆
3 - 38
Hardware Requirements
May 2001
SECTION 7
DETERMINING
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
To determine equipment type and quantity to be installed, the technician
must be familiar with station equipment available and interface ETUs.
7.1
Station Equipment
The station equipment that can be installed with the Xen System is
listed below:
Table 3-1 Station Equipment Table
Equipment
Description
DTU-8-1A(WH) TEL
8-line digital Multiline Terminal without LCD
DTU-8D-1A(WH) TEL
8-line digital Multiline Terminal with LCD and
softkeys
DTU-16D-1A(WH) TEL
16-line digital Multiline Terminal with LCD and
softkeys
DTU-32D-1A(WH) TEL
32-line digital Multiline Terminal with LCD and
softkeys
DCU-60-1A(WH) CONSOLE
Attendant Console with 60 programmable line
keys
ETW-8E-1A(SW) TEL
8-line Multiline Terminal without LCD
ETW-16C-1A(SW) TEL
16-line Multiline Terminal with LCD
ETW-24S-1A(SW) TEL
24-line Multiline Terminal with LCD
EDW-48-2A(SW) Console
48-button DSS/BLF Console with 12 additional
function buttons
#
7.2
ETW-type TEL are not available in New Zealand.
Interface ETUs
The slots in the Xen Master KSUs are completely flexible except for
the first slot in each KSU that is reserved for the CPUB( )-U13 ETU
or EXP-U13 ETU. Table 3-2 Interface Slot and System Port
Numbers for a Xen System shows the slot and port numbers.
The MIFA-U13 ETU must be installed in the ISA slot for MIS (part of
the ACD feature) to work.
MIFM-U13 ETU must be installed in slots S1 or S2 for the internal
socket modem to work. It can be installed in the ISA slot or S1/S2 if
a locally provided external modem is used.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The slots in the Xen Axis KSU are also flexible in their cord
assignments, except for some specific cases which will be detailed
later in this manual. Slot 1 is dedicated to the first eight ESI ports
and is actually built in to the mainboard along with the system’s
CPU.
The MIFM-U13 ETU must be installed in slot S2 for the internal
socket modem to work.
System Hardware Manual
3 - 39
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Basic and Expansion KSUs for CPUB-U13 ETU
Table 3-1
2nd
EXP
KSU
136
144
152
160
168
176
184
192
135
143
151
159
167
175
183
191
134
142
150
158
166
174
182
190
133
141
149
157
165
173
181
189
132
140
148
156
164
172
180
188
131
139
147
155
163
171
179
187
130
138
146
154
162
170
178
186
129
137
145
153
161
169
177
185
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
Table 3-2
1st
EXP
KSU
72
80
88
96
104
112
120
128
71
79
87
95
103
111
119
127
70
78
86
94
102
110
118
126
69
77
85
93
101
109
117
125
68
76
84
92
100
108
116
124
67
75
83
91
99
107
115
123
66
74
82
90
98
106
114
122
65
73
81
89
97
105
113
121
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
ISA
BUS
Basic
KSU
SLOT
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
7
15
23
31
39
47
55
63
6
14
22
30
38
46
54
62
5
13
21
29
37
45
53
61
4
12
20
28
36
44
52
60
3
11
19
27
35
43
51
59
Table 3-2 Interface Slot and System Port Numbers for a Xen System
3 - 40
Hardware Requirements
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Table 3-3
May 2001
Table 3-3 Interface Slot and System Port Numbers for Xen Axis System
8
16
24
32
40
48
7
15
23
31
39
47
6
14
22
30
38
46
5
13
21
29
37
45
4
12
20
28
36
44
3
11
19
27
35
43
2
10
18
26
34
42
1
9
17
25
33
41
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
Mainboard
S1
7.2.1
S2
Determining Telephone and CO Port Numbers
Telephone and CO Ports numbers are provided with the
Xen System. Port numbers are used to count the station
numbers and trunk numbers when programming System
Data. The examples below indicates how the station and
trunk numbers can be used.
Xen Master:
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Table 3-4 Sample Master Configuration
Slot
ETU
ISA
MIFM-U13
S1
ESI(8)-U13
S2
TLI(2)-U13
S3
CO1(8)-U13
S4
PRI(1)-U13 (10ch.)
S5
Open
S6
VMS(8)-U13
S7
CNF(8)-U13
S8
SLI(4)-U13
Table 3-5 Telephone and CO Port Nos Example
MIF
01
ISA
Telephone
Ports
1~8
S1
System Hardware Manual
Trunk
Ports
1~4
S2
Trunk
Ports
5 ~ 12
S3
Trunk
Ports
13 ~ 20
S4
Trunk
Ports
21 ~ 30
S5
Telephone
Ports
9 ~ 16
Telephone
Ports
17 ~ 24
Telephone
Ports
25 ~ 28
S6
S7
S8
3 - 41
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Xen Axis:
Slot
ETU
S1
ESI(8)-U13 (Built-in)
S2/ISA
MIFM-U13
S3
COI(8)-U13
S4
TLI(2)-U13
S5
ESI(8)-U13
S6
SLI(8)-U13
S7
VMS(8)-U13
Table 3-6 Sample Axis Port Assignment
Telephone
Ports
1~8
S1
MIF
01
S2
Telephone
Ports
9~10
Ports
1~8
S3
S4
7.2.2
Telephone
Ports
9~16
S5
Telephone
Ports
17~24
Telephone
Ports
25~32
S6
S7
Determining the Number of Required Interface ETUs
Table 3-7 Number of Required Interface ETUs indicates
each feature and the associated hardware necessary for
the operation of the feature.
Table 3-7 Number of Required Interface ETUs
Feature
Least Cost Routing
Required ETU or
Unit
MIFM-U13
Maximum
ETUs per
System
Required
Feature Key
KMM(XXX)UA
1
or
SMDR
MIFM-U13
None
1
PC Programming
MIFM-U13
None
1
Caller ID (Refer to Note)
MIFM-U13
KMM(XXX)UA
1
Uniform Call Distribution
MIFA-U13
None
1
Automatic Call Distribution
MIFA-U13
KMA(XXX)UA
1
(Xen Master Only)
Note:
3 - 42
The Caller ID feature works without the MIFM-U13 ETU. However,
the Caller ID scrolling and dialling functions both require the MIFMU13 ETU.
Hardware Requirements
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
KML(XXX)UA
May 2001
PBR Requirements
The Xen Master and Xen Axis systems have four built-in
Push Button Receiver (PBR) circuits on the CPUB ( )-U13
ETUs and B48( )-U13 KSU mainboard respectively. The
PBR circuit detects and translates DTMF tones generated
by Single Line Telephones, facsimile machines, modems,
and analogue voice mail ports. Incoming DTMF signals
can also be detected from a CO trunk using the DISA
features. The system Auto Attendant feature and DISA
feature must use the PBR circuits built in to the CPU card/
mainboard.
An optional PBR( )-U13 ETU can be installed providing an
additional four circuits. The number of PBR circuits
needed depends on the number of Single Line
Telephones, facsimile machines, modems, and analogue
voice mail ports needed. If Automated Attendant and DISA
trunks are connected to the system, these must also be
taken into consideration.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
7.2.3
System Hardware Manual
3 - 43
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
3 - 44
Hardware Requirements
Installing KSUs
Chapter 4
SECTION 1
GENERAL
INFORMATION
This chapter provides the information necessary to install the KSUs for the
Xen system. The technician should be familiar with this section before
installing any equipment.
SECTION 2
SITE PREPARATION
AND MDF/IDF
CONSTRUCTION
Planning the installation before actually installing the system is advisable.
Advanced planning minimizes installation time, cost and disruption of the
customer business activities.
2.1
Precautionary Information
!
2.2
Observe the following warnings during installation.
•
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
•
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the
jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
•
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals
unless the telephone line is disconnected at the network
interface.
•
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Surveying the Customer Site
In most cases, a survey of the customer site is necessary to
determine the proper placement of the Main Distribution Frame
(MDF), the exact dimensions of the area selected for the MDF,
cabling requirements, and possible Intermediate Distribution Frame
(IDF) locations.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The information obtained at the customer site can permit the
installer to partially assemble the MDF before installing at the
customer premise. This can help reduce the time spent installing at
the customer site to reduce their downtime.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 45
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
2.3
Selecting the Best Location for Proper Installation
Selecting the KSU Installation Site
When a site is selected for the installation of the KSU the
following conditions should be considered to ensure proper
installation.
✆
KSUs are normally wall mounted to protect against
accident or flooding.
✆
The KSU should not be located directly beneath
pipes. Should leaks or condensation occur, damage
could be caused to the Xen system equipment.
✆
The area where the KSU is located must be free of
corrosive and inflammable gases, excessive chemical
or industrial dusts, and other materials that could
cause a hazard to personnel or to the proper
functioning of the equipment.
✆
The operating ambient temperature and humidity
must be within the limits specified in 4.2.2
Environmental Conditions in Chapter 2 System
Specifications.
✆
The operation of the system is virtually noiseless and
allows wide selection of installation sites. Care should
be taken to ensure the KSUs do not present a hazard
to office traffic. To minimize cabling costs, a
centralized location should be chosen.
✆
The KSU must be located at a site where it can easily
be connected to a dedicated AC power source.
✆
Connect the KSU only to a dedicated AC receptacle
that is not being used for any other devices such as
computers, copiers, or facsimile machines. Ensure
that the AC outlet is properly grounded.
✆
Avoid installing the KSU in the vicinity of a radio
receiver.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2.3.1
4 - 46
Installing KSUs
May 2001
2.3.2
Selecting a Permanent MDF Location
When selecting a permanent site for the MDF, the
technician may encounter some of the following situations.
✆
Limited space is available for installation, but must
be used.
✆
The available space may pose one or more
environmental hazards.
✆
The proposed location has limitations such as
insufficient lighting or the lack of a suitable ground for
the KSUs.
When the technician encounters these situations, he must
provide the best possible solution for installing the
equipment. This document cannot cover all possible
situations, precautions, and actions.
2.3.3
Selecting a Site for Installing the Telephones
When a site is selected for the installation of the
telephones, the following conditions should be considered
to ensure proper installation.
Ensure that the cable length and line resistance (loop),
between the KSU and the telephones, comply with the
specifications show in Chapter 2, Table 2-3 Multiline Terminal
Loop Resistance and Cable Length.
✆
Some devices require an external power supply. Select a
place where they can be easily connected to an AC outlet.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
✆
System Hardware Manual
4 - 47
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
2.4
Cabling to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
The Xen KSU is connected to each of the Multiline Terminals, Single
Line Telephones, optional equipment, CO/PBX, DID, ISDN, on a 4wire E&M Tie lines (Types I and V) by separate twisted-pair cable
through the MDF. The 4-wire E&M Tie lines and ISDN lines require
multiple twisted-pair cabling. Refer to Table 4-1 MDF Cable
Connections - Xen Master and Refer to Table 4-3 MDF Cable
Connections - Xen Axis which provide the necessary cabling
information.
TLI(2)
+R
x
DPH
PRI(1)
+Rx1
ECR
BRI(4)
COI/
COID(8)
COI/
COID(4)
DID(4)
BSU(2)
BIU(2)
OPX(2)
MDF Cable Connections - Xen Master
SLI(4)
SLI(8)
ESI(8)
Station
Cable
Running
Cable
MDF Pin
No.
Circuit
No.
Table 4-1
First ETU
WH–BL
BK
T
T
T
T
-Rx-1
-Rx-1
T
T
T
+Rx1
R
R
R
-Rx-1
-Rx
-Tx-1
T
T
T
+Tx1
+T
x
1
1
BL–WH
YL
R
R
R
R
+Rx1
27
WH–OR
BK
T
T
T
T
-Tx-1
2
2
OR–WH
YL
R
R
R
WH–GN
BK
T
T
3
GN–WH
YL
R
29
WH–BR
BK
T
28
3
R
+Tx1
+Tx1
EP
Zone 2
DP2
E-1
R
-Tx-1
T
T
T
T
+Rx2
R
R
R
R
R
-Rx-2
R-1
T
T
T
T
T
+Tx2
T11
-Tx
M-1
EP
Zone 1
Night Chime
BR–WH
YL
R
R
30
WH–SL
BK
T
T
-Rx-2
-Rx-2
T
+Rx3
R
R
R
R
5
SL–WH
YL
R
R
+Rx2
+Rx2
R
-Rx-3
31
RD—BL
BK
T
T
-Tx-2
-Tx-2
T
+Tx3
BL–RD
YL
R
R
+Tx2
+Tx2
R
-Tx-3
RD-OR
BK
T
T
T
-Rx-4
7
OR–RD
YL
R
R
R
-Rx-4
33
RD–GN
BK
T
T
T
+Tx-r
GN–RD
YL
R
R
R
-Tx-4
DP3
T-1
DP4
R11
-Tx-2
5
6
External
Tone
Ringer 4
DLR
1
External
Tone
Ringer 3
DLR
2
GN
D
E-2
M-2
7
8
8
DP1
R
4
32
EP
Zone 3
R
4
6
GN
D
External
Tone
Ringer 2
DLR
3
External
Tone
Ringer 1
DLR
4
T-2
R-2
T12
R12
Second ETU
34
RD–BR
BK
T
T
T
T
-Rx-1
-Rx-1
R
+Rx1
+Rx1
T
T
T
+Rx1
+R
x
1
9
4 - 48
BR–RD
YL
R
R
R
R
R
R
-Rx-1
EP
Zone 3
GN
D
DP1
-Rx
Installing KSUs
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
26
BSU(2)
T
-Tx-1
-Tx-1
T
T
T
+Tx1
+T
x
2
10
SL–RD
YL
R
R
R
BK–BL
BK
T
T
11
BL–BK
YL
R
37
BK–OR
BK
T
36
3
R
+Tx1
+Tx1
R
-Tx-1
T
T
T
T
+Rx2
R
R
R
R
R
-Rx-2
R-1
T
T
T
T
T
+Tx2
T11
-Tx
M-1
EP
Zone 1
Night Chime
OR–BK
YL
R
R
38
BK–GN
BK
T
T
-Rx-2
-Rx-2
T
+Rx3
R
R
R
R
13
GN–BK
YL
R
R
+Rx2
+Rx2
R
-Rx-3
39
BK–BR
BK
T
T
-Tx-2
-Tx-2
T
+Tx3
BR–BK
YL
R
R
+Tx2
+Tx2
R
-Tx-3
BK–SL
BK
T
T
T
-Rx-4
15
SL–BK
YL
R
R
R
-Rx-4
41
YL–BL
BK
T
T
T
+Tx4
BL–YL
YL
R
R
R
-Tx-4
DP3
6
7
8
T-1
DP4
R11
-Tx-2
5
External
Tone
Ringer 4
DLR
1
External
Tone
Ringer 3
DLR
2
GN
D
E-2
M-2
External
Tone
Ringer 2
External
Tone
Ringer 1
DLR
3
DLR
4
T-2
R-2
T12
R12
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
16
E-1
R
12
40
DP2
R
4
14
EP
Zone 2
TLI(2)
BIU(2)
T
DPH
OPX(2)
T
ECR
SLI(4)
T
PRI(1)
SLI(8)
BK
BRI(4)
ESI(8)
RD–SL
COI/
COID(8)
COI/
COID(4)
DID(4)
Station
Cable
35
Running
Cable
MDF Pin
No.
Circuit
No.
May 2001
System Hardware Manual
4 - 49
TLI(2)
+R
x
DPH
PRI(1)
+Rx1
ECR
BRI(4)
COI/
COID(8)
COI/
COID(4)
DID(4)
BSU(2)
BIU(2)
OPX(2)
SLI(4)
SLI(8)
ESI(8)
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Station
Cable
Running
Cable
MDF Pin
No.
Circuit
No.
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
EP
Zone 3
DP1
GN
D
EP
Zone 2
DP2
E-1
EP
Zone 1
DP3
Third ETU
42
YL–OR
BK
T
T
OR–YL
YL
R
R
T
T
-Rx-1
-Rx-1
T
R
+Rx1
+Rx1
R
R
T
T
-Tx-1
-Tx-1
T
R
+Tx1
+Tx1
R
R
T
-Rx-2
T
+Rx2
R
R
T
-Tx-2
T
R
+Tx2
T
T
1
17
43
YL–GN
BK
T
T
GN–YL
YL
R
R
R
R
T
-Rx
-Rx-1
T
+Tx1
+T
x
2
18
44
YL–BR
BK
T
T
BR–YL
YL
R
R
R
R
T
-Tx
T
+Rx2
3
19
45
YL–SL
BK
T
T
R
R
T
T
+Tx2
SL–YL
YL
R
R
46
VI–BL
Bk
T
T
-Rx-2
T
+Rx3
R
R
R
21
BL–VI
YL
R
R
+Rx2
R
-Rx-3
47
VI–OR
BK
T
T
-Tx-2
T
+Tx3
OR–VI
YL
R
R
+Tx2
R
6
23
49
T11
VI–GN
BK
T
T
T
-Rx-4
GN–VI
YL
R
R
R
-Rx-4
VI–BR
BK
T
T
T
+Tx4
BR–VI
YL
R
R
R11
External
Tone Ringer
4
External
Tone
Ringer 3
DLR
1
GN
D
E-2
DLR
2
M-2
-Tx-3
8
24
DP4
-Tx-2
5
7
R-1
Night Chime
20
48
T-1
-Rx-2
4
22
M-1
-Tx-1
R
-Tx-4
External
Tone Ringer
2
DLR
3
External
Tone Ringer
1
DLR
4
T-2
R-2
T12
R12
50
25
☛ PFT circuits are only connected to AMP3.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
☛ AMP1 is connected to S1, S2, and S3.
☛ AMP2 is connected to S4, S5, and S6.
☛ AMP3 is connected to S7, S8 and PFT.
Table 4-2
4 - 50
Power Fail Transfer Connections - Xen Master
Installing KSUs
May 2001
MDF Pin
Number
PFT
Connection
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
PFT2 - CO (Tip)
20
PFT2 - CO (Ring)
46
PFT2 - SLI (Tip)
21
PFT2 - SLI (Ring)
47
PFT2 - SLT (Tip)
22
PFT2 - SLT (Ring)
48
PFT3 - CO (Tip)
23
PFT3 - CO (Ring)
49
PFT3 - SLI (Tip)
24
PFT3 - SLI (Tip)
50
PFT3 - SLT (Tip)
25
PFT3 - SLT (Tip)
Power Failure
Transfer Relay
2
Power Failure
Transfer Relay
3
☛ PFT circuits are only connect to AMP3
☛ AMP1 is connected to S1, S2 and S3
☛ AMP2 is connected to S4, S5 and S6
BIU(2)
PRI(1)
DPH
ECR
BRI(4)
TLI(2)
DID(4)
COID(4)
COI(4)
COID(8)
COI(8)
BSU(2)
OPX(2)
SLI(4)
SLI(8)
ESI(8)
Station
Cable
Running
Cable
Circuit
No.
Table 4-3 MDF Cable Connections - Xen Axis
MDF
Pin No.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
☛ AMP3 is connected to S7, S8 and PFT
Amphenol 1
System Hardware Manual
4 - 51
WH–
GN
BK
T
3
GN–
WH
YL
R
29
WH–
BR
BK
T
BR–
WH
YL
R
WH–SL
BK
T
SL–WH
YL
R
RD—
BL
BK
T
BL–RD
YL
R
RD-OR
BK
T
OR–RD
YL
R
RD–GN
BK
T
GN–RD
YL
R
BIU(2)
28
PRI(1)
R
DPH
YL
ECR
OR–
WH
BRI(4)
2
TLI(2)
T
DID(4)
BK
COID(4)
WH–
OR
COI(4)
27
COID(8)
R
COI(8)
YL
BSU(2)
BL–WH
OPX(2)
1
SLI(4)
T
26
SLI(8)
ESI(8)
BK
Circuit
No.
WH–BL
MDF
Pin No.
Station
Cable
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Running
Cable
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
1
2
SLOT 1
3
4
4
30
5
5
31
6
6
32
7
7
33
8
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
8
4 - 52
Installing KSUs
OPX(2)
BSU(2)
COI(8)
COID(8)
COI(4)
COID(4)
DID(4)
TLI(2)
BRI(4)
T
T
T
-RX-1
T
T
T
T
T
GN
D
+Rx1
1
BR–RD
YL
R
R
R
R
+RX1
RD–SL
BK
T
T
T
T
-TX-1
T
T
T
T
T
E-1
+Tx1
SL–RD
YL
R
R
R
R
+TX1
R
R
R
R
R
M-1
-Tx1
BK–BL
BK
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T-1
+Rx2
11
BL–BK
YL
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R-1
-Rx2
37
BK–OR
BK
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T11
+Tx2
R
R11
-Tx2
GN
D
+Rx3
9
35
2
10
36
R
R
R
R
R
SLOT 3
4
OR–BK
YL
R
R
38
BK–GN
BK
T
T
13
GN–BK
YL
R
39
BK–BR
BK
T
R
R
R
-RX-2
T
T
R
+RX2
R
R
T
-TX-2
T
T
+TX2
R
R
5
6
14
BR–BK
YL
R
R
BK–SL
BK
T
15
SL–BK
YL
41
YL–BL
BK
40
E-2
R
R
M-2
-Tx3
T
T
T
T-2
-Rx4
R
R
R
R
R-2
-Rx4
T
T
T
T
T12
+Tx4
R
R12
-Tx4
R
R
R
EP Zone 1
DP3
Night Chime
DP4
External Tone
Ringer 4
DLR
1
External Tone
Ringer 3
DLR
2
External Tone
Ringer 2
DLR
3
External Tone
Ringer 1
DLR
4
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
YL
DP2
+Tx3
8
BL–YL
EP Zone 2
-Rx3
7
16
DP1
-Rx1
3
12
EP Zone 3
BIU(2)
SLI(4)
T
PRI(1)
SLI(8)
BK
DPH
ESI(8)
RD–BR
ECR
Station
Cable
34
Running
Cable
Circuit
No.
MDF
Pin No.
May 2001
System Hardware Manual
4 - 53
OPX(2)
BSU(2)
COI(8)
COID(8)
COI(4)
COID(4)
DID(4)
TLI(2)
BRI(4)
T
T
T
-RX-1
T
T
T
T
T
GN
D
+Rx1
1
17
43
YL–GN
YL
BK
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
+RX1
R
-TX-1
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
T
-Rx1
-Rx
+Tx1
+T
x
E-1
EP Zone 2
GN–YL
44
YL
R
R
R
R
+TX1
R
R
R
R
R
-Tx1
YL–BR
BK
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T-1
+Rx2
19
BR–YL
YL
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R-1
-Rx2
45
YL–SL
BK
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T11
+Tx2
4
SLOT 4
SL–YL
46
YL
R
R
R
R
R
VI–BL
Bk
T
T
-RX-2
T
T
BL–VI
YL
R
R
+RX2
R
R
R
R
R
R11
-Tx2
GN
D
+Rx3
5
21
47
48
VI–OR
BK
T
T
-TX-2
T
T
E-2
OR–VI
YL
R
R
+TX2
R
R
M-2
+Tx3
EP Zone 1
DP 3
Night Chime
DP 4
External Tone
Ringer 4
DLR
1
External Tone
Ringer 3
DLR
2
External Tone
Ringer 2
DLR
3
External Tone
Ringer 1
DLR
4
-Tx-3
VI–GN
BK
T
T
T
T
T-2
-Rx-4
23
GN–VI
YL
R
R
R
R
R-2
-Rx-4
49
VI–BR
BK
T
T
T
T
T12
+Tx4
BR–VI
YL
R
R
R
R
R12
-Tx-4
7
8
24
-Tx
-Rx-3
6
22
DP 2
M-1
3
20
DP 1
R
2
18
+R
x
EP Zone 3
OR–YL
BIU(2)
SLI(4)
T
PRI(1)
SLI(8)
BK
DPH
ESI(8)
YL–OR
ECR
Station
Cable
42
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Running
Cable
Circuit
No.
MDF
Pin No.
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
50
TO CO MDF FOR PFT
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
25
4 - 54
Installing KSUs
DP2
EP
Zone 1
DP3
Night Chime
DP4
External Tone
Ringer 4
DLR
1
External Tone
Ringer 3
DLR
2
External Tone
Ringer 2
DLR
3
External Tone
Ringer 1
DLR
4
BIU(2)
DPH
EP
Zone 2
PRI(1)
ECR
BRI(4)
TLI(2)
DID(4)
COID(4)
COI(4)
COID(8)
COI(8)
BSU(2)
OPX(2)
SLI(4)
SLI(8)
ESI(8)
Station
Cable
Running
Cable
Circuit
No.
MDF
Pin No.
May 2001
Amphenol 2
1
BL–WH
YL
R
R
R
R
+RX1
R
R
R
27
WH–
OR
BK
T
T
T
T
-TX-1
T
T
T
R
+TX1
E-1
2
2
OR–
WH
YL
R
R
R
28
WH–
GN
BK
T
T
T
R
R
R
M-1
T
T
T
T-1
3
3
GN–
WH
YL
R
R
R
R
R
R
R-1
29
WH–
BR
BK
T
T
T
T
T
T
T11
R
R11
SLOT 5
4
4
BR–
WH
YL
R
R
30
WH–SL
BK
T
T
-RX-2
T
R
R
R
R
GN
D
5
5
SL–WH
YL
R
R
+RX2
31
RD—
BL
BK
T
T
-TX-2
T
E-2
+TX2
R
M-2
6
6
BL–RD
YL
R
R
RD-OR
BK
T
T
T
T-2
7
OR–RD
YL
R
R
R
R-2
33
RD–GN
BK
T
T
T
T12
R
R12
32
7
9
GN–RD
YL
R
R
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
8
System Hardware Manual
4 - 55
1
R
9
35
BR–RD
YL
R
R
RD–SL
BK
T
T
2
10
R
SL–RD
YL
R
R
BK–BL
BK
T
T
11
BL–BK
YL
R
R
37
BK–OR
BK
T
T
36
T
R
T
R
+RX1
R
R
R
-TX-1
T
T
T
+TX1
R
R
M-1
T
T
T
T
T-1
R
R
R
R
R-1
T
T
T
T11
R
R11
3
4
SLOT 6
R
12
OR–BK
YL
R
R
R
38
BK–GN
BK
T
T
13
GN–BK
YL
R
R
+RX2
R
39
BK–BR
BK
T
T
-TX-2
T
-RX-2
T
R
GN
D
5
6
14
BR–BK
YL
R
R
BK–SL
BK
T
15
SL–BK
YL
41
YL–BL
BK
40
+TX2
R
M-2
T
T
T-2
R
R
R
R-2
T
T
T
T12
R
R12
8
YL
R
R
EP
Zone 1
DP3
Night Chime
DP4
External Tone
Ringer 4
DLR
1
External Tone
Ringer 3
DLR
2
External Tone
Ringer 2
DLR
3
External Tone
Ringer 1
DLR
4
BIU(2)
DP2
PRI(1)
EP
Zone 2
-Rx-1
+Rx1
-Tx-1
+Tx1
-Rx-2
+Rx2
-Tx-2
+Tx2
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
BL–YL
DP1
E-2
7
16
EP
Zone 3
E-1
R
T
DPH
GN
D
BRI(4)
T
ECR
T
TLI(2)
T
DID(4)
-RX-1
COID(4)
T
COI(4)
T
COID(8)
T
COI(8)
T
BSU(2)
SLI(8)
BK
OPX(2)
ESI(8)
RD–BR
SLI(4)
Station
Cable
34
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Running
Cable
Circuit
No.
MDF
Pin No.
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
4 - 56
Installing KSUs
T
GN
D
R
R
T
T
1
17
OR–YL
43
18
YL–GN
2
44
GN–YL
YL
BK
YL
R
T
R
R
T
R
R
T
R
R
T
R
+RX1
R
-TX-1
T
+TX1
E-1
R
R
R
M-1
YL–BR
BK
T
T
T
T
T
T
T-1
19
BR–YL
YL
R
R
R
R
R
R
R-1
45
YL–SL
BK
T
T
T
T
T
T
T11
R
R11
4
SLOT 7
YL
R
R
R
R
R
VI–BL
BK
T
T
-RX-2
T
GN
D
5
21
BL–VI
YL
R
R
+RX2
R
47
VI–OR
BK
T
T
-TX-2
T
22
6
48
+Tx1
EP
Zone 1
OR–VI
YL
R
R
+TX2
External Tone
Ringer 4
E-2
R
M-2
VI–GN
BK
T
T
T
T-2
23
GN–VI
YL
R
R
R
R-2
49
VI–BR
BK
T
T
T
T12
BR–VI
YL
R
R
R
R12
8
-Rx-2
+Rx2
-Tx-2
External Tone
Ringer 3
7
24
+Rx1
Night Chime
SL–YL
46
-Rx-1
-Tx-1
EP
Zone 2
3
20
EP
Zone 3
BIU(2)
T
PRI(1)
T
DPH
-RX-1
ECR
COI(8)
T
BRI(4)
BSU(2)
T
TLI(2)
OPX(2)
T
DID(4)
SLI(4)
T
COID(4)
SLI(8)
BK
COI(4)
ESI(8)
YL–OR
COID(8)
Station
Cable
42
Running
Cable
Circuit
No.
MDF
Pin No.
May 2001
+Tx2
External Tone
Ringer 2
External Tone
Ringer 1
50
25
EXTERNAL PAGE OUTPUT
Slot 1 is ESI(8)-U13 built-in on the MBD-U13 Unit.
#
Slot 2 does not have MDF connections. This slot can be used for VRS, PBR, VDH, MIFM, CNF, VMS and FMS.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
#
System Hardware Manual
4 - 57
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
2.5
Power Failure Transfer
The Power Failure Transfer relay is located in the KSU. When
selecting a Single Line Telephone for power failure transfer, make
sure it matches the CO line dialling type (10 pps, 20 pps, or DTMF)
where it is connected. Refer to Figure 4-1 Xen Master - Power
Failure Transfer Connection, Section 2 - 2.6 Fax CO Branch
Connection, Table 4-2 Power Fail Transfer Connections - Xen
Master and Figure 4-2 Xen Axis - Power Failure Transfer
Connection.
Note: The relay is shown with the power ON.
T
E
L
C
O
M
D
F
SLT
Tip
M
D
F
Ring
C
O
I
Relay (on KSU)
S
L
I
Tip
Ring
Figure 4-1 Xen Master - Power Failure Transfer Connection
M
D
F
Tip
Ring
AMP1
50
M
D
F
SLT
Tip
Ring
25
Figure 4-2 Xen Axis - Power Failure Transfer Connection
4 - 58
Installing KSUs
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
T
E
L
C
O
May 2001
2.6
Fax CO Branch Connection
This connection is made via the fourth port on any COI(4)-U13 or
COID(4)-U13 ETU. Refer to Figure 4-1 Typical Full MDF Layout.
The facsimile machine is connected to the eighth port for the
specified slot where the COI(4)-U13 ETU is installed.
SECTION 3
INSTALLING THE XEN
MASTER KSU
The compact design of the Xen Master KSUs provide easy installation. The
information in this section provides detailed instructions for installing the
KSUs.
!
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
the
system;
observe
the
following
✆
Before beginning installation, be sure that the Power Supply Unit
(PSU) is OFF and that the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet.
✆
Do not touch the soldered surfaces of the ETUs with your hands.
3.1
System Hardware Manual
Before installing
precautions
General Information
3.1.1
Basic KSU
The B64-U13 KSU provides service for outside lines,
Attendant Consoles, and interconnection of the station
terminals. The B64-U13 KSU provides 64 ports and has
two fixed and eight flexible slots. The fixed slots are
reserved for the CPUB( )-U13 ETU and the MIF( )-U13
ETU. A Power Supply Unit (P64-U13 PSU) and backup
batteries are provided with the basic KSU.
3.1.2
Expansion KSUs
The E64-U13 KSU is the expansion unit that can be
attached to the basic KSU to provide an additional 64
ports. Two expansion units can be added to the Xen
Master system, providing a maximum of 192 ports. Each
expansion KSU provides eight flexible slots and
accommodates 8-channel interface cards. A Power
Supply Unit (P64-U13 PSU) and backup batteries are
included with each expansion unit.
The installation instructions provided in this chapter apply
to both the basic B64-U13 KSU and the expansion
E64-U13 KSUs unless otherwise specified.
4 - 59
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.2
Removing the KSU Cover
The front cover must be removed to access the battery, cables and
ETU slots:
1.
Loosen the screw that is located near the on/off switch, on the
right side of the KSU. Do not remove screw from the unit.
2.
Remove the front panel by sliding it to the right and pulling it
outward.
Figure 4-3 Removing the Front Panel of the KSU
3.3
Installing a Front Cover Extender (FCE-U13 Unit)
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
When installing a VDH2(8)-U13 ETU, a Front Cover Extender is
required to allow for the cabling.
Figure 4-4 Front Cover Extender (FCE-U13 Unit)
4 - 60
Installing KSUs
May 2001
1.
Install the ETU in the KSU and connect the applicable cables.
When installing a VDH2(8)-U13 ETU, mount the cable clamp
on the KSU frame as shown in Figure 4-5 Mounting the Cable
Clamp on the KSU Frame.
Figure 4-5 Mounting the Cable Clamp on the KSU Frame
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2.
Attach the sponge (provided) to the inner surface of the clamp
lining and close the clamp over the cables as shown in Figure
4-6 Attaching the Sponge to the Clamp.
Figure 4-6 Attaching the Sponge to the Clamp
System Hardware Manual
4 - 61
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.
Attach the front cover (previously removed) to the front cover
extender using the two screws. Refer to Figure 4-7 Attaching
the Front Cover and Front Cover Extender.
Figure 4-7 Attaching the Front Cover and Front Cover Extender
Attach the front cover and the front cover extender to the KSU
by sliding the hooks (located on the top of the front extender
cover) into the slots and fasten using the provided screw. Refer
to Figure 4-8 Attaching the Front Cover and the Front Cover
Extender to the KSU.
Figure 4-8 Attaching the Front Cover and the Front Cover Extender to the KSU
4 - 62
Installing KSUs
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
4.
May 2001
3.4
Securing Cables Using the Velcro Strap
When attaching the amphenol cables to the side of the KSU, they
can be secured using the provided velcro strap. When wall
mounting, this should be done prior to attaching the KSU to the wall
mount bracket.
1.
Thread the velcro strap through the hook on the back side of
the KSU.
Figure 4-9 Threading the Velcro Strap Through the Hook on the KSU
2.
When one or two amphenol cables are attached to the KSU,
the velcro strap can be threaded around the cable and through
the hooks.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-10 Threading the Velcro Strap to Secure One or Two Amphenol Cables
System Hardware Manual
4 - 63
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.
When all three amphenol cables are used, the velcro strap is
threaded around the cables and attached to the KSU.
Figure 4-11 Threading the Velcro Strap to Secure Three Amphenol Cables
3.5
Wall Mounting the Basic KSU
1.
Before wall mounting the KSU, the wall mount bracket should
be attached to fire retardant plywood. Using the four (locally
provided) screws, attach the wall mount bracket to the wall as
shown in Figure 4-12 Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-12 Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket
4 - 64
Installing KSUs
May 2001
2.
After the bracket is mounted to the wall, peel off the spacer
backing. Place and adhere the spacer to the position shown in
Figure 4-14 Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket With Spacer.
Figure 4-13 Attaching the Wall Mount Bracket Spacer
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.
Hang the KSU on the two hooks protruding from the wall
mount bracket as shown in Figure 4-14 Hanging the Basic
KSU on the Bracket.
Figure 4-14 Hanging the Basic KSU on the Bracket
System Hardware Manual
4 - 65
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.
Secure the KSU to the wall by placing a screw and washer
(locally provided) into the hole in the centre of the wall mount
bracket as shown in Figure 4-15 Securing the Basic KSU to the
Wall.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-15 Securing the Basic KSU to the Wall
4 - 66
Installing KSUs
May 2001
3.6
Wall Mounting the Expansion KSU
1.
Position the bottom of the Expansion Wall Mount Bracket on to
the top of the Basic Wall Mount Bracket and fasten with four
(locally provided) screws. Refer to Figure 4-13 Attaching the
Wall Mount Bracket and Figure 4-16 Attaching the Expansion
Wall Mount Bracket to the Basic Wall Mount Bracket.
Figure 4-16 Attaching the Expansion Wall Mount Bracket to the Basic Wall Mount
Bracket
Hang the KSU on the two hooks protruding from the expansion
wall mount bracket as shown in Figure 4-14 Hanging the Basic
KSU on the Bracket.
3.
Secure the KSU to the wall by placing a screw (locally
provided) into the hole in the centre of the wall mount bracket
as shown in Figure 4-15 Securing the Basic KSU to the Wall.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 67
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.7
Floor Mounting the Basic KSU
A system may be floor mounted if a suitable wall is not available.
The three KSUs of the system mount on top of each other in the
following manner:
1.
Using the four (locally provided) screws, attach the floor mount
bracket to the floor.
2.
Slide the KSU over the four hooks protruding from the floor
mount bracket as shown in Figure 4-17 Floor Mounting the
Basic KSU.
Figure 4-17 Floor Mounting the Basic KSU
Secure the KSU to the floor mounting bracket using the two
screws as indicated in Figure 4-18 Securing the KSU to the
Floor Mounting Bracket.
Figure 4-18 Securing the KSU to the Floor Mounting Bracket
4 - 68
Installing KSUs
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.
May 2001
3.8
Cable Routing
3.8.1
Connecting the Battery Expansion Cables on the KSU
1.
Using the DC Expansion Cable (included with the
EXP-U13 ETU) connect the BATTERY EXT on the
Basic KSU to the BATTERY EXT of the
Expansion KSU.
Tie Wrap
Expansion Cable
Power Cable
FG Terminal
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-19 Connecting DC Expansion Cables
System Hardware Manual
4 - 69
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
2.
When connecting an Expansion KSU, use the two
screws to attach the FG plate to the Basic and
Expansion KSUs. Refer to Figure 4-20 Attaching the
Frame Ground Plate. (When installing a second
Expansion KSU, another FG plate is required).
FG Plate
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-20 Attaching the Frame Ground Plate
4 - 70
Installing KSUs
May 2001
3.8.2
Grounding Requirements
The KSUs must be properly grounded. B64-U13 and E64U13 KSUs are provided with two grounding methods. The
first method is via the protective earth pin of the 3-pin
mains plug. In cases where this ground is questionable, an
alternative ground must be provided.
1.
Connect the grounding cable (green wire) to the
ground terminal on the right side of the Basic KSU.
The grounding cable (locally provided) must have an
AWG greater than #16.
Figure 4-21 KSU Grounding
2.
Provide a suitable ground inside of the building in
accordance
with
local
telephone
company
procedures.
3.
If no suitable ground is available, a ground rod
should be installed in accordance with the operating
procedures of the local telephone company.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
!
System Hardware Manual
The
Protective
Earth
and
Telecommunications
Reference
Conductor (TRC) is permanently
linked within the KSU, therefore,
the Xen Master does not require
the connection of an external
TRC.
4 - 71
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.9
Replacing the Power Supply Unit in the KSU
The Xen system is supplied with a P64-U13 PSU. The Power Supply
Unit has a battery backup interface and accepts 240 Vac -50Hz and
outputs +5V and –24V to the system.
!
3.9.1
Before replacing the PSU, remove the defective
PSU and verify that the power cord on the
replacement KSU is unplugged.
Installing the P64-U13 PSU
1.
Locate the PSU in the space provided and connect
the 8-wire cable from the PSU to the connector on the
backboard of the KSU. Refer to Figure 4-22
Connecting Wires to the PSU.
Cable
Connections
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-22 Connecting Wires to the PSU
4 - 72
Installing KSUs
May 2001
2.
Install the P64-U13 PSU into the bottom space of the
KSU and attach to the KSU using the two provided
screws. Refer to Figure 4-23 Mounting the PSU onto
the KSU.
Figure 4-23 Mounting the PSU onto the KSU
3.
Lead the KSU power cable through the clamp and
connect the PSU as shown in Figure 4-24
Connecting the PSU Power Cable to the Basic KSU.
Clamp
Cla
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
FG
Clamp
Power
Figure 4-24 Connecting the PSU Power Cable to the Basic KSU
System Hardware Manual
4 - 73
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.9.2
Connecting Battery Expansion Cables to the Expansion
KSU:
1.
Using the Battery Expansion Cables (included in the
Expansion KSU) lead the expansion cables through
the clamps and tie them to the KSU with a tie wrap on
the expansion KSU.
Tie Wrap
Frame
Ground
Terminal
DC
Expansion
Cable
DC
Expansion
Cable
Figure 4-25 Connecting Battery Expansion Cables to the Expansion KSU
When using two expansion KSUs, connect the PSU
of each expansion KSU with the Battery expansion
cables and lead the cables through the clamps and
tie them with a tie wrap.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2.
4 - 74
Installing KSUs
May 2001
3.9.3
Fuse Replacement
!
For continued protection against risk of fire,
replace fuses with the same type and rating
originally installed.
1.
Turn off the power switch and remove the front cover
on the KSU. (Refer to Figure 4-3 Removing the Front
Panel of the KSU).
2.
Pull out the drawer that holds the PSU and
disconnect the cable as shown in Figure 4-26
Removing the PSU from the KSU.
Cable
Connections
Figure 4-26 Removing the PSU from the KSU
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.
Replace the fuses as necessary and return the PSU
to the KSU. Fuse F1 is a 250V, 2.5A fuse for AC
input. Fuse F101 is a 125V, 10A fuse for DC input.
F101 (DC In)
F1 (AC In)
Figure 4-27 PSU Fuse Replacement
System Hardware Manual
4 - 75
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.10
Installing Built-In and External Batteries in the KSU
3.10.1
Built-In Battery Installation
1.
Connect the two batteries in series as shown in
Figure 4-28 Connecting Built-In Batteries. The red
cord attaches to the red terminal and the black cord
attaches to the black terminal.
!
Be careful not to misconnect
terminals of the batteries.
the
Figure 4-28 Connecting Built-In Batteries
Install the batteries into the bottom space at the left
side the KSU. Refer to Figure 4-29 Placing the
Batteries into the KSU.
3.
Install the battery cover as illustrated in Figure 4-29
Placing the Batteries into the KSU.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2.
Figure 4-29 Placing the Batteries into the KSU
4 - 76
Installing KSUs
May 2001
4.
Connect the cable to the BATTERY INT connector of
the PSU as shown in Figure 4-30 Connecting the
Batteries to the Power Supply Unit.
Figure 4-30 Connecting the Batteries to the Power Supply Unit
3.10.2
External Battery Installation
Batteries that are purchased locally can be connected to
the system as external batteries.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
!
When installing external batteries, disconnect
the battery cable for the built-in batteries from
the BATTERY INT connector of each KSU. If
the built-in batteries are connected with the
external batteries, a large amount of charging
current may flow from the external batteries
to the built-in batteries. This can cause
battery cable burns.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 77
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.10.2.1 Floor Mounting the EBB Box using the
Mounting Bracket.
1. Position the floor mount bracket at the
installation position on the floor, then install
the floor mount with the 4 anchor bolts
(6mm), not supplied). Refer to Figure 4-31
Floor Mount Anchor Points.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-31 Floor Mount Anchor Points
4 - 78
Installing KSUs
May 2001
2. Slide the battery box floor side backward
from the front side of the floor mount so that
holes A-E at the base of the battery box
match with points and slide point E into
hole E.
Figure 4-32 Fitting the Battery Box to Floor Mount
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3. Install EBB to floor mount using the 2
screws supplied with EBB.
Figure 4-33 Installing EBB
System Hardware Manual
4 - 79
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4. Install the supplied anchor to the top of the
EBB using the 4 6mm 0 screws supplied.
Figure 4-34 Installing the Anchor
5. Install KSU on top of the anchor. For the
installation procedure, see steps 2 and 3 of
section 3.2.1, “Installing Basic Unit to Floor”.
3.10.2.2 Floor Mounting an EBB Box Using L Type
Metal Plate.
Note:
4 - 80
When using the EBB box, the main device
cannot be wall-mounted.
Installing KSUs
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
First using the optional floor mount (STB-U13
Unit), fix the optional battery box (EBB-U13
Box) to the floor. Next, using the attached
anchor (for both wall and floor installation), fix
the base unit (B64-U13 KSU) to the top of the
EBB as shown in the following procedure.
May 2001
First secure battery box to floor using the 2 Lshaped metal plates provided with the battery
box (EBB-U13 Box). Then using the supplied
anchor (for both wall and floor installation),
install the base component (B64-U13 KSU) to
the top of the battery box. The procedure is
shown below:
1. Secure the L type plates to the 4 holes in
the sides of the battery box using the 44
mm 0 screws supplied.
Figure 4-35 Secure the L Type Plates
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2. Place the box in its installation position and
secure the L type plate by 4 6mm O anchor
bolts in the 4 holes on the floor side of the L
type plate.
Figure 4-36 Installation Position
System Hardware Manual
4 - 81
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3. Secure the supplied anchor on top of the
battery box as shown in the diagram using
the 4 x 6mm screws supplied.
Figure 4-37 Secure Anchor
4. Install KSU on top of the anchor. For the
installation procedure, see steps 2 and 3 of
section 3.2, “Installing Basic Unit to Floor”.
3.10.3
Installing External Battery in EBB Box
4 - 82
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-38 Installing External Battery
Installing KSUs
May 2001
3.10.3.1 External Battery Installation
The installation procedure of the external
battery (EBT-U13 BATT) is explained below. In
this example, the external battery box (EBBU13 Box) is secured by the installation plate
(STB-U13 UNIT), and the basic unit (B64-U13
KSU) and external unit (E64-U13 KSU) are
installed on top of the EBB.
!
When using the external battery,
disconnect the battery cable of the
internal battery (P64-U13 INTERNAL
BATT) of the basic unit and the
external unit from the power unit
(B64-U13 PSU). If both are used
together, the life of both batteries
will be shortened, and a malfunction
may result.
1. Remove the 2 screws from inside the EBB,
then remove the terminal board plate from
the battery installation tray.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2. Connect the external batteries (2 batteries =
1 unit) to the terminal board as shown,
attaching cables to the external battery and
the battery box.
Figure 4-39 Attaching Cables
System Hardware Manual
4 - 83
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
.
Figure 4-40 Attaching Cables to External Battery
3. Install the external battery into the EBB.
Position the external battery so that its right
side is against point A of the battery
installation tray
4 - 84
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-41 Right Side of Battery
Installing KSUs
May 2001
4. Install the terminal board plate to the battery
installation tray of the EBB using 2 screws.
Figure 4-42 Installing the Terminal Board
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
5. As shown below, connect the EBB cable
attached to the terminal board and the
battery relay cable, then connect the battery
relay cable to the BATTERY EXT socket of
the power unit of the basic unit.
Figure 4-43 Connecting the EBB Cable
System Hardware Manual
4 - 85
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
6. Use the cable clamps at the circled
locations in the diagram to clamp the EBB
cable and the battery relay cable.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-44 Clamping the Cables
4 - 86
Installing KSUs
May 2001
SECTION 4
INSTALLING THE XEN
AXIS KSU
The compact design of the Xen Axis KSU provides easy installation. The
KSU can only be wall mounted.
!
Before beginning installation, be sure that the Power Supply
Unit (PSU) is OFF and the power cord is disconnected from
the AC outlet.
Do not touch the soldered surfaces of the ETUs with your
hands.
4.1
General Information
4.1.1
4.2
KSU
The B48-U13 KSU provides service for outside lines,
Attendant Consoles and interconnection to the station
terminals. The B48-U13 KSU provides 48 ports and has
two fixed and five flexible slots. Fixed slot S1 is reserved
for the first 8 ESI ports that are mounted on the MBD-U13
Unit. Fixed slot S2 is for the MIFM-U13 ETU. A Power
Supply Unit (P64-U13 PSU) and backup batteries are
provided with the KSU.
Removing the KSU Cover
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
To access the battery, cables and ETU slots, the front cover must be
removed.
1.
Loosen the screws near the bottom of the KSU. Do not remove
screws from the unit.
2.
Pull the front cover off toward you.
Figure 4-45 Removing the KSU Cover
System Hardware Manual
4 - 87
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.
Securing Cables using the Velcro Strap
When attaching the amphenol cables to the side of the KSU,
they can be secured using the provided velcro strap. This
should be done prior to attaching the KSU to the wall mount
bracket.
a.
Thread the velcro strap through the hook on the back side
of the KSU.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-46 Threading the Velcro Strap Through the Hook on the KSU
4 - 88
Installing KSUs
May 2001
4.3
Wall Mounting the KSU
1.
Using the template and two of the four (locally provided)
screws, attach screws to the wall as shown in Figure 4-47
Using the Template. Do not thread in the last 3mm of
the screws.
Figure 4-47 Using the Template
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2.
Hang the KSU as shown in Figure 4-48 Hanging the KSU.
Figure 4-48 Hanging the KSU
System Hardware Manual
4 - 89
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.
Install screws in bottom of KSU and tighten screws at top.
Figure 4-49 Installing Screws
Grounding Requirements
The KSU must be properly grounded. The Xen Axis KSU is
provided with two grounding methods. The first method is
the typical ac third-wire ground. In cases where this ground
is questionable, an alternative ground must be provided.
1.
Connect the ground cable (green wire) to the ground
terminal on the right side of the KSU. The grounding
cable (locally provided) must have an AWG greater
than #16.
2.
Provide a suitable ground inside of a building in
accordance
with
local
telephone
company
procedures.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
4.3.1
4 - 90
Installing KSUs
May 2001
3.
If not suitable ground is available, a ground rod
should be installed in accordance with the operating
procedures of the local telephone company.
Figure 4-50 KSU Grounding
4.4
Replacing the Power Supply Unit in the KSU
The Xen system is supplied with P64-U13 PSU. The Power Supply
Unit has a battery backup interface and accepts 240 Vac and
outputs +5V and -24V to the system.
!
Before replacing the PSU, remove the defective PSU
and verify that the power cord on the replacement PSU
is unplugged.
Disconnect power cord from P64-U13 PSU AC IN Connector.
2.
Remove two screws from front of PSU.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
1.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 91
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.
Pull out the power supply being removed, and disconnect the
white cable attached to the MBD-U13 unit from the PSU. Refer
to Figure 4-51 Disconnecting Cable from the PSU.
4.
Refer to Figure 4-52 Installing the KSU in the PSU. Install the
P64-U13 PSU into the left space of the KSU, connect white
cable attached to MBD-U13 Unit, and attach PSU to the KSU
using the two screws removed in Step 1.
5.
Connect the power cord to AC IN connector as per Figure 4-52
Installing the KSU in the PSU.
Figure 4-52 Installing the KSU in the PSU
4 - 92
Installing KSUs
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 4-51 Disconnecting Cable from the PSU
May 2001
4.5
Fuse Replacement
!
For continued protection against risk of fire, replace
fuses with the same type and rating originally installed.
1.
Disconnect AC power and remove the front cover on the KSU.
(Refer Figure 4-3 Removing the Front Panel of the KSU).
2.
Loosen two screws on the removable access plate to the left of
the PSU then remove the plate.
3.
Replace the fuses as necessary. Refer to Figure 4-53 PSU
Fuse Replacement. F1 is a 250V, 2.5A fuse for AC input. Fuse
F101 is a 125V, 10A fuse for DC input.
Figure 4-53 PSU Fuse Replacement
Install the access plate and tighten the screws.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
4.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 93
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.6
Installing Built-in and External Batteries in the KSU
4.6.1
Built in Battery Installation
1.
Connect the two batteries in series as shown in
Figure 4-54 Connecting Built-in Batteries. The red
cord attaches to the red terminal and the black cord
attaches to the black terminal.
!
Be careful to ensure the cords are
connected to the correct the battery
terminals.
Figure 4-54 Connecting Built-in Batteries
Slide the batteries into the bottom space at the left
side of the KSU, and install the battery cover as
illustrated in Figure 4-55 Installing the Batteries in the
KSU.
Figure 4-55 Installing the Batteries in the KSU
4 - 94
Installing KSUs
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2.
May 2001
3.
Connect the cable to the BATTERY INT connector of
the PSU as shown in Figure 4-57 Connecting Cables
for External Batteries.
igure 4-56 Connecting the Batteries to the Power Supply Unit
4.6.2
External Battery Installation
Batteries that are purchased locally can be connected to
the system as external batteries.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
!
When
installing
external
batteries,
disconnect the battery cable for the built-in
batteries from the BATTERY INT connector
of the KSU. If the built-in batteries are
connected with the external batteries, a large
amount of charging current may flow from
the external batteries to the built-in batteries.
This can cause battery cable burns.
System Hardware Manual
4 - 95
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
1.
Connect cabling to the external batteries as shown in
Figure 4-57 Connecting Cables for External Batteries.
Figure 4-57 Connecting Cables for External Batteries
Route the cables through the clamps on the bottom
right-hand side of the KSU.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2.
4 - 96
Installing KSUs
May 2001
3.
Connect the external batteries to the KSU in the
location shown in Figure4-16 Connecting the
External Power Cables to the PSU. Connect the
external battery cable to the BATTERY EXT
connector on the PSU of the KSU. Bundle any extra
cabling together.
Figure 4-58 Connecting the External Power Cables to the PSU
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
4.
Reinstall the KSU cover. Refer to Figure 4-59
Reinstalling the KSU Cover.
Figure 4-59 Reinstalling the KSU Cover
System Hardware Manual
4 - 97
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
4 - 98
Installing KSUs
Installing Electronic
Telephone Units
SECTION 1
GENERAL
INFORMATION
Chapter 5
Each Electronic Telephone Unit (ETU) is installed in a slot of the Basic or
Expansion KSU. This chapter describes each ETU and the installation
procedures.
Xen Master
The B64-U13 KSU has 10 slots that are divided into three categories.
CPU/EXP Slot
This is the first slot located on the left side of the KSU. A CPUB( )-U13 ETU
must be installed in this slot in the Basic KSU and an EXP-U13 ETU must
be installed in this slot in the Expansion KSU.
!
If the CPUB( )-U13 ETU is installed in slots S1~S8, it will be
damaged!
ISA Slot
The ISA slot, the second slot in the Basic KSU, is reserved for the MIFAU13 or MIFM-U13 ETU. The ISA slot is not available in the Expansion KSU.
Interface Slots (1~8)
Interface slots are physically located in slots 3~10 but are labelled S1~S8
on the KSU. All other interface ETUs can be installed in any of these slots.
The first and second slots (S1 and S2) of the B64-U13 KSU are universal
slots that support the MIFA-U13 ETU or MIFM-U13 ETU
Xen Axis
The B48-U13 KSU has seven slots:
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Fixed ESI Slot
Slot S1 of the B48-U13 KSU is a fixed ESI slot that is mounted on the MBDU13 Unit.
ISA Slot
Slot S2 is the ISA slot and is reserved for the MIFA-U13 or MIFM-U13 ETU.
Interface Slots
Slots S3~S7 are the B48-U13 KSU interface slots with Amphenol
Connectors.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 99
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION
Xen Master & Xen Axis
2.1
Installation Precautions
!
Observe the following precautions when installing the
ETUs to avoid static electricity damage to hardware or
exposure to hazardous voltages.
✆
The ETUs used in this system make extensive use of CMOS
technology that is very susceptible to static; therefore, extreme
care must be taken to avoid static discharge when
handling ETUs.
✆
Make all switch setting changes on the ETU before inserting it
into the KSU.
✆
When installed, the component side of all ETUs must face the
left side of the KSU. Ejector tabs are always on top. Refer to
Figure 1-1 Inserting the ETU into the KSU.
Figure 1-1 Inserting the ETU into the KSU
When carrying an ETU be sure to keep it in a conductive
polyethylene bag to prevent damage due to static electricity.
✆
When handling an ETU the installer must wear a grounded
wrist strap to protect the ETU from static electricity.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
✆
5 - 100
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
✆
When inserting or removing an ETU, be sure the wrist strap is
connected to the Frame Ground Terminal on the KSU.
Figure 5-2 Wrist Strap Grounding
✆
When holding an ETU be sure you do not touch the
components or the soldered surfaces with your bare hands.
Place one hand under the bottom corner of the ETU and with
the other hand hold the ejector tab (located in the top corner of
the ETU).
Eject
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 5-3 Handling an ETU
System Hardware Manual
5 - 101
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
✆
When setting switches on the ETU, wear a wrist strap and
stand on a grounded conductive work surface to avoid static
electricity.
ETU
Wrist
Grounded
Conductive
Figure 5-4 Safety Precautions when Setting Switches on an ETU
✆
Inserting an ETU into the KSU Slots
1.
To unlock the ETUs slots, push the slide bar to the left (B64/
E64-U13 KSU only).
2.
Slide the ETU into the proper slot in the KSU and push all the
way to the back of the KSU.
3.
Lock the ETU by pushing the slide bar to the right to secure the
ETU (B64/E64-U13 KSU only).
Figure 5-5 Sliding the ETU into the KSU Slot
5 - 102
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
2.2
Remember not to touch the surface of the ETU. A small screw
driver can be used to change the switch settings if the installer
follows the recommended safety precautions.
May 2001
2.3
Removing an ETU from the KSU
1.
To unlock the ETUs, push the slide bar to the left. (B64-U13
KSU and E64-U13 KSU only).
2.
Lift the ejector tab on the ETU and pull the ETU out of the slot.
Figure 5-6 Lifting the Ejector Tabs on the ETU
To lock the ETU into place, push the slide bar to the right.
(B64-U13 KSU and E64-U13 KSU only).
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 103
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
SECTION 3
COMMON CONTROL
ETUS
The Electronic Telephone units described in this section control the common
functions of the KSU. The information applies to both the Xen Master and
Xen Axis systems unless stated otherwise.
3.1
CPUB( )-U13 ETU (Xen Master Only)
3.1.1
Description
The CPUB-U13 ETU is the Central Processing Unit for the
Xen Master system. This ETU has a Central Processing
Unit and a Microprocessing Unit and supports a maximum
of 192 ports.
A 32-bit microprocessor executes the programs stored on
the Flash ROM ICs of the MPU unit. This controls the
entire system when data is transferred to and from
other ETUs.
This ETU includes the following items:
3.1.2
✆
Time Division Switch (TDSW)
✆
Static Random Access Memory (SRAM)
✆
32-bit Processor
✆
4-channel DTMF Receiver (PBR)
✆
Sixteen 4-party Conference Circuits
✆
Internal (digital music) Music-on-Hold source
✆
External Music-on-Hold input (also used for station
background music)
✆
Flash ROM
✆
Call Progress and DTMF Tone Generator
✆
Memory Backup Battery
approximately 21 days)
(Retains
memory
for
Installation
!
5 - 104
If the CPUB( )-U13 ETU is installed in slots
S1~S8, it will be damaged!
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Install this ETU in the CPU slot (first slot) of the B64-U13
KSU. One CPUB( )-U13 ETU is installed with each
system. Refer to Figure 5-7 CPUB( )-U13 ETU.
May 2001
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 5-7 CPUB( )-U13 ETU
System Hardware Manual
5 - 105
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.1.3
Switch Settings
The following Table 5-1 CPUB( )-U13 ETU Default Switch
Settings indicates the default switch settings.
Table 5-1 CPUB( )-U13 ETU Default Switch Settings
SW1-1
Off
On
Off
On
SW1-2
Description
Off
Normal Operation
Off
Flash ROM load from COM1 port
On
Factory Test
On
Flash ROM load from EPROM
SW1-3
Description
Not Used
Off
SW2
Description
Momentary Switch
SW3-1
System Reset
Description
System boot by EPROM
On
Off
System boot by Flash ROM
SW3-2
Description
Off
Pressing SW2 interrupts all service and causes
a second initialization. This switch should not
be used in an operating system unless
absolutely necessary.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
!
Not Used
5 - 106
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
3.1.4
Connectors
Before programming System Data, the battery must be
connected to CN4 to allow memory retention if a power
failure or brownout occurs. If a brownout or power failure
does occur, and the battery backup circuit is not activated,
System Data resets to the default values, all stations in the
system reset to the default values, and any data
programmed on individual stations is cleared.
When a CPUB( )-U13 ETU is installed in the system, the
clock/calendar must be set. This also applies when battery
backup fails for any reason.
If the CPUB( )-U13 ETU is removed for long term storage,
disconnect the battery from CN4. This prevents the battery
from discharging completely. The fully charged battery
retains memory for approximately 21 days.
The following connectors are located on the CPUB( )-U13
ETU.
3.1.5
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
✆
CN2
Connects to the ISA-bus.
✆
CN3
Connects to CN2 on the EXP-U13 ETU
via the expansion cable
✆
CN4
Connects to the memory backup battery
via the battery cable (factory installed)
✆
CN5
Connects to CN1 of the CLKG-U13 Unit
✆
CN6
Connects to CN2 of the CLKG-U13 Unit
LED Indications
LED1 indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red
Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LED2 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red
System Power On
Off
No Power
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
✆
System Hardware Manual
5 - 107
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.1.6
Replacing Memory Backup
The CPUB( )-U13 ETU provides memory backup for
approximately 21 days. The Ni-Cad battery should be
replaced about every two years.
3.1.7
1.
Remove the battery cable from CN4 on the
CPUB(0)-U13 ETU. (Refer to Figure 5-7
CPUB( )-U13 ETU.)
2.
Connect the cable from the new battery to CN4 on
the CPUB(0)-U13 ETU.
3.
Turn off the KSU power.
4.
Remove the CPUB( )-U13 ETU from the slot in the
KSU.
5.
Using nippers or other similar cutting tool, cut the tie
wrap that fastens the old battery and remove the old
the battery.
6.
Fasten the new battery with a tie wrap.
7.
Install the CPUB( )-U13 ETU again.
8.
Turn on the KSU power.
Main Software Upgrade for CPUB( )-U13
5 - 108
1.
Down load and store the current data base using
current MAT.
2.
Ensure the memory backup battery is connected to
the CPUB( )-U13 ETU (CN4 connector).
3.
Power off system.
4.
Remove the CPUB( )-U13 ETU from the KTS.
5.
Move SW3-1 to the 'ON (EPROM)' position.
6.
Move SW 1-1&2 to the 'ON(UP)' position ("3" is not
used)
7.
Install Eprom into Socket IC5 (Refer Fig 5-7)
8.
Remove old PAL, Socket IC 30, and install new main
software compatible PAL. (Refer supplier for
compatibility information)
9.
Re-Install the CPUB( )-U13 ETU.
10.
Power On system
11.
LED's 1 & 2 will flash (approximately 2 minutes) while
Eprom is writing to the Flash Roms
12.
LED's 1 & 2 go solid when upload is complete.
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The Xen system uses Flash ROM to store system main
software. This allows convenient upgrade of its ability in
terms of features. The following instructions are for main
software upgrade for CPUB( )-U13.
May 2001
3.2
13.
Power off system when upload is completed.
14.
Remove the CPUB( )-U13 card.
15.
Return SW1 and SW3 to their normal position.
16.
Remove EPROM
17.
Install the CPUB( )-U13 ETU again.
18.
Power on system and operate as normal.
19.
Save data base with a compatible MAT (refer
supplier for relevant information)
EXP-U13 ETU (Xen Master Only)
3.2.1
Description
The EXP-U13 ETU is the Expansion KSU Controller for
the Xen Master system. This ETU controls data
transmission between the CPUB( )-U13 ETU and the other
ETUs installed in the expansion KSU if it is installed. Refer
to Figure 5-8 EXP-U13 ETU.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 5-8 EXP-U13 ETU
System Hardware Manual
5 - 109
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.2.2
Installation
Turn system power off, and install the EXP-U13 in the
expansion ETU.
Use the Expansion Cable (included with the EXP-U13
ETU) to connect the CPUB( )-U13 ETU to the Expansion
ETU. Fix the Expansion Cable to the KSU Frame using
tie wraps.
Tie Wraps
Tie Wraps
Figure 5-9 Connecting the Expansion Cable
5 - 110
The following connectors are located on the EXPU13 ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard.
✆
CN2
Connects to CN3 on the CPUB( )-U13
ETU or CN3 on EXP-U13 ETU
(installed in the first expansion
cabinet) using an expansion cable.
✆
CN3
Connects to the CN2 on the EXP-U13
ETU installed in the third expansion
cabinet using the expansion cable.
This connector is not used if the EXPU13 ETU is installed in the last
expansion KSU or if a third KSU is not
installed.
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.2.3
May 2001
3.3
MBD-U13 Unit for B48-U13 KSU (Xen Axis Only)
3.3.1
Description
The MBD-U13 Unit (installed on the B48-U13 KSU) is the
Central Processing Unit for the Xen Axis system. This ETU
has a Central Processing Unit and a Microprocessing Unit
and supports a maximum of 48 ports. Refer to Figure 5-10
KSU MBD-U13 Unit.
A 32-bit microprocessor executes the programs stored on
the Flash ROM ICs of the MBD-U13 Unit. This controls the
entire system when data is transferred to and from
other ETUs.
This ETU includes the following items:
✆
Time Division Switch (TDSW)
✆
Static Random Access Memory (SRAM)
✆
32-bit Processor
✆
4-channel DTMF Receiver (PBR)
✆
Sixteen 4-party Conference Circuits
✆
Internal (digital music) Music-on-Hold source
✆
External Music-on-Hold input (also used for station
background music)
✆
Flash ROM
✆
Call Progress and DTMF Tone Generator
✆
Memory backup Battery
approximately 21 days)
✆
8 Electronic Station Interface (ESI) ports
✆
6 Flexible Card Slots
memory
for
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
(Retains
System Hardware Manual
5 - 111
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Figure 5-10 KSU MBD-U13 Unit
3.3.2
Switch Settings
The following Table 5-2 MIFM-U13 Switch Settings
indicates the default switch settings.
Off
On
Off
On
SW1-2
Off
Normal Operation
Off
Flash ROM load from COM1 port
On
Factory Test
On
Flash ROM load from EPROM
SW1-3
Description
Not Used
Off
SW2
Momentary Switch
SW3-1
5 - 112
Description
Description
System Reset
Description
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
SW1-1
May 2001
Pressing SW2 interrupts all service and causes
a second initialization. This switch should not
be used in an operating system unless
absolutely necessary.
!
On
Off
System boot by Flash ROM
SW3-2
Description
Off
3.3.3
System boot by EPROM
Not Used
Connectors
Before programming System Data, the battery must be
connected to CN4 to allow memory retention if a power
failure or brownout occurs. If a brownout or power failure
does occur, and the battery backup circuit is not activated,
System Data resets to the default values, all stations in the
system reset to the default values, and any data
programmed on individual stations is cleared.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The following connectors are located on the MBDU13 ETU.
System Hardware Manual
✆
MOH IN
For Music on Hold input
✆
PFT
For Power Failure Transfer
✆
COM1
For LCR/PC programming
✆
COM2
For SMDR
✆
CN4
For backup battery
✆
CN5
Connects to CN1 of the CLKG-U13
Unit
✆
CN6
Connects to CN2 of the CLKG-U13
Unit
✆
AMP1
MDF cabling connection for slots 1, 3,
4
✆
AMP2
MDF cabling connection for slots 5, 6,
7
✆
CN403
Power Supply connection
5 - 113
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.3.4
LED Indications
CPU LIVE indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red
Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LED2 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red
System Power On
✆
3.3.5
Off
No Power
ESI LIVE
✆
Steady Red
ESI On
✆
ESI Off
Off
ESI Busy
✆
Steady Red
ESI Busy
✆
ESI available
Off
Replacing Memory Backup
The MBD( )-U13 ETU provides memory backup for
approximately 21 days. The Ni-Cad battery should be
replaced about every two years.
Figure 5-11 KSU Backup Battery Replacement
5 - 114
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Refer to Figure 5-11 KSU Backup Battery Replacement.
May 2001
3.3.6
1.
Remove the battery cable from CN4 on the MBD(0)U13 ETU.
2.
Connect the cable from the new battery to CN4 on
the MBD( )-U13 ETU.
3.
Turn off the KSU power.
4.
Using nippers or other similar cutting tool, cut the tie
wrap that fastens the old battery and remove the old
battery.
5.
Fasten the new battery with a tie wrap.
6.
Turn on the KSU power.
Main Software Upgrade for KSU MBD-U13 Unit
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The Xen system uses Flash ROM to store system main
software. This allows convenient upgrade of its ability in
terms of features. The following instructions are for main
software upgrade for KSU MBD-U13 Unit.
System Hardware Manual
1.
Down load and store the current data base using
current MAT.
2.
Ensure the memory backup battery is connected to
the KSU MBD-U13 Unit (CN4 connector).
3.
Power off system.
4.
Move SW3-1 to the 'ON (EPROM)' position.
5.
Move SW 1-1&2 to the 'ON(UP)' position ("3" is not
used)
6.
Install Eprom into Socket IC5 (Refer Fig 5-10)
7.
Remove old PAL, Socket IC 30, and install new main
software compatible PAL. (Refer supplier for
compatibility information)
8.
Power On system
9.
LED's 1 & 2 will flash (approximately 2 minutes) while
Eprom is writing to the Flash Roms
10.
LED's 1 & 2 go solid when upload is complete.
11.
Power off system when upload is completed.
12.
Return SW1 and SW3 to their normal position.
13.
Remove EPROM
14.
Power on system and operate as normal.
15.
Save data base with a compatible MAT (refer
supplier for relevant information).
5 - 115
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.4
CLKG-U13 Unit
3.4.1
Description
The CLKG-U13 Unit provides clock synchronisation for
ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI lines that are connected to the
system, as well as for the PHS facility. Refer to Figure 5-12
CLKG-U13 Unit.
This unit works in conjunction with the BRT(4)-U13,
PRT(1)-U13 ETU, BSC-U13 ETU or BSU(2)-U13 ETU,
and is plugged onto the CPUB( )-U13 ETU or MBD-U13
Unit.
Figure 5-12 CLKG-U13 Unit
3.4.2
Installation
Only one CLKG-U13 Unit can be installed in a Xen system.
3.4.3
Connectors
✆
5 - 116
CN2
Connects to CN6 on the CPUB( )-U13
ETU or MBD-U13 Unit.
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The following connectors are located on the CLKG-U13
ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to CN5 on the CPUB( )-U13
ETU or MBD-U13 Unit.
May 2001
3.4.4
Switch Settings
Set SW1 according to the equipment installed, as follows:
3.5
ISDN.PHS
When a BRT(4)-U13 ETU or PRI(1)-13
ETU are installed, with or without a BSCU13 ETU or BSU(2)-U13 ETU (Default).
PHS
When a BSC-U13 ETU or BSU(2)-U13
ETU is installed, but both the BRT(4)-13
ETU and PRI(1)-U13 ETU are not.
MIFM-U13 ETU
3.5.1
Description
The MIFM-U13 ETU provides additional memory and
processing power for PC Programming, SMDR, LCR, and
Caller ID. PC Programming and SMDR are standard with
this ETU. LCR and Caller ID require the KML(XXX)UA Unit
or the KMM(XXX)UA Unit to be mounted on the
MIFM U13 ETU.
Figure 5-13 MIFM-U13 ETU
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.5.2
Installation
A maximum of one MIFM-U13 ETU can be installed in the
Xen system.
When the MIFM-U13 ETU is installed in an IF slot (as
opposed to the ISA slot) the MIF-Modem (MDM-U13 Unit)
can be mounted on the MIFM-U13 ETU. This method is
desirable because the MIF-Modem Unit does not require
any external cabling to analogue ports.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 117
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
In the Xen Master, the MIFM-U13 can be installed in the
ISA slot or the first or second Interface Slot (S1, S2) in the
basic KSU. Note however that if the MIF-Modem is
required, the MIFM-U13 ETU must be installed in slot S1
or S2, NOT the ISA slot. The MIFM-U13 ETU cannot be
installed in an expansion KSU.
In the Xen Axis, the MIFM-U13 ETU must be installed in
the ISA Slot S2.
3.5.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 5-2 MIFM-U13 Switch Settings for
MIFM-U13 ETU default switch settings.
Table 5-2 MIFM-U13 Switch Settings
SW2-1
Off
3.5.4
SW2-2
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
Description
Normal Operation
Factory Test
Not Used
Flash ROM load from
EPROM
SW1
Description
On
System boot by Flash ROM
Off
System boot by EPROM
LED Indications
LIVE LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red
Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No power
LED1 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red
Problem while loading FROM
EEPROM (when using this mode)
5 - 118
✆
Steady Red
PC
Programming
or
Programming is connected
✆
Flashing Red
Loading FROM from EEPROM
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
LCR
May 2001
3.5.5
Connectors
The following connectors are located on the MIFM-U13
ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the Backboard
✆
CN2
Connects to the Backboard
✆
CN3
Connects the ETU backup battery. It
connects
the
battery
during
installation, and disconnects the
battery when storing the ETU.
✆
CN4, CN5
Connectors for the optional MIFModem (MDM-U13 Unit).
✆
IC6
Socket for the optional KMM(XXX)UA
or KML(XXX)UA Units.
SMDR and PC Programming connections are made via
the COM ports on the KSU.
✆
COM1
PC/LCR Programming
✆
COM2
SMDR
Both COM ports are standard female RS-232C DCE ports.
A straight cable is required.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
When an external modem is used, connect the modem to
COM1 port via the modem cable adapter. A straight RS232C cable is required.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 119
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.6
MIFA-U13 ETU
3.6.1
Description
The MIFA-U13 ETU provides additional memory and
processing power to support UCD.
In the Xen Master, the MIFA-U13 ETU can also support the
ACD/MIS facility by installing the KMA(XXX)UA Unit onto
this ETU.
Figure 5-14 MIFA-U13 ETU
3.6.2
Installation
In the Xen Master, the MIFA-U13 ETU can be installed in
the ISA slot, first Interface slot (S1), or second Interface
slot (S2) of the basic KSU. Note however that the MIFAU13 ETU must be installed in the ISA slot if the MIS
terminal is to be connected to COM4. The MIFA-U13 ETU
cannot be installed in an Expansion KSU.
In the Xen Axis, the MIFA-U13 ETU must be installed in
the ISA slot S2.
5 - 120
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
One MIFA-U13 ETU can be installed in the Xen system.
May 2001
3.6.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 5-3 MIFA-U13 ETU Switch Settings for
MIFA-U13 ETU default switch settings.
Table 5-3 MIFA-U13 ETU Switch Settings
SW2-1
SW2-2
Off
3.6.4
Off
Description
Normal Operation
On
Off
Factory Test
Off
On
Not Used
On
On
Flash ROM load from EPROM
SW1
Description
On
System boot by Flash ROM
Off
System boot by EPROM
LED Indications
LIVE LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red
Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LED1 indications are listed below
3.6.5
✆
Steady Red
Problem while loading FROM from
EEPROM (when using this mode)
✆
Steady Red
PC
Programming
or
Programming is connected
✆
Flashing Red
Loading FROM from EEPROM
LCR
Connectors
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The following connectors are located on the MIFA-U13
ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the Backboard
System Hardware Manual
✆
CN2
Connects to the Backboard
✆
CN3
Connects the ETU backup battery. It
connects
the
battery
during
installation, and disconnects the
battery when storing the ETU.
✆
IC6
Socket for the optional KMA
(XXX)UA Unit (applicable to Xen
Master Only)
5 - 121
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
On the Xen Master, the ACD MIS cable connects to COM4
on the KSU. It is a standard female RS-232C DCE port. A
straight RS-232C cable is required.
3.7
KMM(XXX)UA Unit
3.7.1
Description
The KMM(XXX)UA Unit is a feature module that mounts on
the MIFM-U13 ETU. This unit is required when LCR or
Caller ID scrolling and dialling features are used.
3.7.2
Installation
Like all ICs, this unit has a notch on one side. Find the
notch on the IC6 silkscreen, and before mounting align the
KMM(XXX)UA unit so that the notches are on the
same side.
3.8
KML(XXX)UA Unit
3.8.1
Description
The KML(XXX)UA Unit is a feature module that mounts on
the MIFM-U13 ETU. It is required when LCR is to be used.
3.8.2
Installation
Like all ICs, this unit has a notch on one side. Find the
notch on the IC6 silkscreen, and before mounting align the
KML(XXX)UA unit so the notches are on the same side.
3.9
KMA(XXX)UA Unit (Xen Master Only)
3.9.1
Description
The KMA(XXX)UA Unit is a feature module that mounts on
the MIFA-U13 ETU. It is required when ACD with MIS is a
required feature.
3.9.2
Installation
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Like all ICs, this unit has a notch on one side. Find the
notch on the IC6 silkscreen, and before mounting align the
KMA(XXX)UA Unit so the notches are on the same side.
5 - 122
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
SECTION 4
INTERFACE ETUS
The Electronic Telephone Units described in this section provide a link
between equipment in the Xen system and outside equipment. All ETUs are
installed in the interface slots of the KSU.
4.1
BRT(4)-U13 ETU
4.1.1
Description
The Basic Rate Trunk Interface (BRT) ETU terminates
ISDN Basic Rate Trunk lines complying to the ETSI
standard. This unit supports four ISDN-BRI trunks, and
each trunk supports two channels. These eight channels
can be used for CO trunks with DTMF signalling.
The BRT(4)-U13 ETU uses an S/T-type interface and
connects to the Network Termination unit (NT1) provided
by the Telco.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Each BRI interface must be of point-to-multipoint type.
Figure 5-15 BRT(4)-U13 ETU
4.1.2
Installation
A maximum of 8 BRT(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Master system, in slots S1~S4 in the first or second
KSU.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 123
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
A maximum of 2 BRT(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Axis system, in slots S3 and S4.
4.1.3
Switch Settings
SW1 is the reset switch.
4.1.4
Jumpers
CN101 and CN102
✆
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Interface 1.
CN101 and CN102 shorted together from the factory
turns on the 100Ω terminal.
CN201 and CN202
✆
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Interface 2.
CN201 and CN202 shorted together from the factory
turns on the 100Ω terminal.
CN301 and CN302
✆
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Interface 3.
CN301 and CN302 shorted together from the factory
turns on the 100Ω terminal.
CN401 and CN402
✆
Set the 100Ω termination to On or Off for Interface 4.
CN401 and CN402 shorted together from the factory
turns on the 100Ω terminal.
4.1.5
LED Indications
LED1 indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red
Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LED2 L1 Status for BRI Interface 1
✆
Steady Red when Layer 1 is working
LED3 L1 Status for BRI Interface 2
✆
Steady Red when Layer 1 is working
LED5 L1 Status for BRI Interface 4
✆
Steady Red when Layer 1 is working
LED6
✆
Steady Red when B1 or B2 are busy in Interface 1.
LED7
✆
Steady Red when B1 or B2 are busy in Interface 2.
5 - 124
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
LED4 L1 Status for BRI Interface 3
✆
Steady Red when Layer 1 is working
May 2001
LED8
✆
Steady Red when B1 or B2 are busy in Interface 3.
LED9
✆
Steady Red when B1 or B2 are busy in Interface 4.
LED10
✆
Steady Red when a communication error occurs, or
during self-diagnostics. This LED is normally off.
LED11 System Communication Indication
✆
Steady Red when a communication error occurs, or
during self-diagnostics. This LED is normally off.
4.1.6
Connectors
The following connector is located on the BRT ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
4.2
PRT(1)-U13 ETU
4.2.1
Description
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The Primary Rate Trunk (PRT) Interface ETU terminates
one Primary Rate ISDN line complying to the ETSI
standard now operating in the Australian network. This
PRI line provides up to 30 voice channels which can be
used as CO trunks with DTMF signalling. Refer to Figure
5-16 PRT(1)-U13 ETU.
Figure 5-16 PRT(1)-U13 ETU
System Hardware Manual
5 - 125
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.2.2
Installation
A maximum of 2 PRT(1)-13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Master system (maximum of 60 trunks), in slot S4 of
the first KSU and slot S1 of the second KSU.
A maximum of 1 PRT(1)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Axis system (maximum of 10 trunks) in slot S4 only.
4.2.3
Switch Settings
Switch SW2 resets the ETU. Switch SW1 settings are:
Table 5-4 PRT(1)-U13 ETU Switch Settings
SW1 Bits
1-3
Usage
Country
Selection
4-8
Not Used
Function
(PRT Firmware V1.00)
Setting
000
Function
(PRT Firmware V1.01 or later)
ETSI PRI (Australia)
INS Net 1500 (Japan
INS Net 1500 (Japan)
ETSI PRI (Australia)
010
NI-2 (USA)
Not Used
011
5ESS (USA)
Not Used
100
DMS100 (USA)
5ESS (USA)
101
4ESS (USA)
DMS100 (USA)
110
Not Used
4ESS (USA)
111
Not Used
NI-2 (USA)
001
00000
4.2.4
LED Indications
Table 5-5 LED Indications
LED1
Colour
Green
LED2
Live
Red
Description
Indicates communication
between ETU and CPU
Call
Indicates Call in progress on any
channel OR channel busy
LED 3
Red
L1 Active
Indicates Physical Link up
condition for ISDN interface
LED 4
Red
SLIP
Indicates SLIP has occurred
LED 5
Red
RAI
Remote Alarm Indication (RAI)
from network OR channel busy
LED 6
Red
LOF
Loss of Frame (LOF) alarm OR
channel busy
LED 7
5 - 126
PCB
Marking
Red
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
from network OR channel busy
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
LED No.
May 2001
Table 5-5 LED Indications (Continued)
LED No.
Colour
PCB
Marking
LED 8
Red
CRC
Cyclic Redundant Check (CRC)
error in frame from network OR
channel busy
LED 9
Red
Ch 0
Channel 0 busy indication
LED 10
Red
Ch 1
Channel 1 busy indication
LED 11
Red
Ch 0
Channel 2 busy indication
4.2.5
4.3
Description
Connectors
CN1
Connects to backboard
CN2
Debug Port
CN3
Log Port
CN4
Expansion Header
CN5
Expansion Header
COI(8)-U( ) ETU
4.3.1
Description
The COI(8)-U13 (U19 for New Zealand) ETU provides an
interface with the Central Office. The COI ETU contains
circuitry for outside ring detection, holding, dialling and
control functions.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
It also incorporates line reversal detection and busy tone
detection circuitry.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 127
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
The COI(8)-U( ) ETU provides identical circuits to serve
up to eight CO trunks that can be any combination of
DTMF and Decadic signalling. Refer to Figure 5-17
COI(8)-U( ) ETU.
Figure 5-17 COI(8)-U( ) ETU
4.3.2
Installation
A maximum of 8 COI(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Master system (maximum of 64 trunks) in slots S1~S8
in the first, second or third KSU.
A maximum of 2 COI(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Axis system (maximum of 16 trunks) in slots S3 ~ S7.
4.3.3
Switch Settings
The Reset Switch resets the Unit.
4.3.4
LED Indications
4.3.5
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
16
✆
LEDs 101~801 indications are listed below.
Steady Red Lines 1~8 busy
✆
Off
Lines 1~8 idle
Connectors
The following connector is located on the COI(8)-U( ) ETU.
5 - 128
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
May 2001
✆
4.4
CN1
Connects to the backboard
COI(4)-U( ) ETU
4.4.1
Description
The COI(4)-U13 (U19 for New Zealand) ETU provides an
interface with the Central Office. The COI ETU contains
circuitry for outside ring detection, holding, dialling and
control functions.
It also incorporates line reversal detection and busy tone
detection circuitry.
The COI(4)-U( ) ETU provides identical circuits to serve
up to four CO trunks that can be any combination of DTMF
and Decadic signalling. Refer to Figure 5-18 COI(4)-U( )
ETU.
Figure 5-18 COI(4)-U( ) ETU
4.4.2
Installation
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
A maximum of 16 COI(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Master system (maximum of 64 trunks) in slots
S1~S8 in the first, second or third KSU.
A maximum of 2 COI(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Axis system (maximum of 8 trunks) in slots S3 ~ S7.
4.4.3
Switch Settings
The Reset Switch resets the Unit.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 129
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.4.4
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LEDs 101~401 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Lines 1~4 busy
✆
Off
Lines 1~4 idle
FAX LEDs indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Fax port is in use (device off-hook)
✆
4.4.5
Off
Fax port is idle (device on-hook)
Connectors
The following connector is located on the COI(4)-U(
ETU.
✆
4.5
CN1
)
Connects to the backboard
COID(8)-U( ) ETU
4.5.1
Description
The COID(8)-U13 (U19 New Zealand) ETU provides an
interface with the Central Office for Caller ID Detection.
This ETU provides circuitry for outside ring detection, hold,
dialling, Caller ID detection, and control functions.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
It also incorporates line reversal detection and busy tone
detection circuitry.
5 - 130
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
The COID(8)-U( ) ETU provides eight trunks that can be
any combination of DTMF or Decadic signalling. Refer to
Figure 5-19 COID(8)-U( ) ETU.
Figure 5-19 COID(8)-U( ) ETU
4.5.2
Installation
A maximum of 8 COID(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in
the Xen Master system (maximum of 64 trunks) in slots
S1~S4 in the first, second KSU.
A maximum of 2 COID(8)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in
the Xen Axis system (maximum of 16 trunks) in slots S3
and S4.
4.5.3
Switch Settings
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The RESET switch resets the unit.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 131
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.5.4
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LED 101~801 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Lines 1~8 busy
✆
4.5.5
Off
Lines 1~8 idle
Connectors
The following connector is located on the COID(8)-U( ).
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
4.6
COID(4)-U( ) ETU
4.6.1
Description
The COID(4)-U13 (U19 New Zealand) ETU provides an
interface with the Central Office for Caller ID Detection.
This ETU provides circuitry for outside ring detection, hold,
dialling, Caller ID detection, and control functions.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
It also incorporates line reversal detection and busy tone
detection circuitry.
5 - 132
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
The COID(4)-U( ) ETU provides four trunks which can be
any combination of DTMF or Decadic signalling. Refer to
Figure 5-20 COID(4)-U( ) ETU.
Figure 5-20 COID(4)-U( ) ETU
4.6.2
Installation
A maximum of 8 COID(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in
the Xen Master system (maximum of 32 trunks) in slots
S1~S4 in the first, second KSU.
A maximum of 2 COID(4)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in
the Xen Axis system (maximum of 8 trunks) in slots S3
and S4.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
4.6.3
Switch Settings
The RESET switch resets the unit.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 133
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.6.4
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LED 101~401 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Lines 1~4 busy
✆
Off
Lines 1~4 idle
FAX LED indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Fax port is in use (device off-hook)
✆
4.6.5
Off
Fax port is idle (device on-hook)
Connectors
The following connector is located on the COID(4)-U( )
ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
4.7
DID(4)-U13 ETU
4.7.1
Description
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The DID(4)-U13 ETU provides interface for Direct Inward
Termination (or DID) lines. This ETU provides for a
maximum of four DID lines. Wink start, delay start,
immediate start, and second Dial Tone are accommodated
with this ETU. Dial Pulse and DTMF are also supported.
There are four built-in DTMF signal detectors. Refer to
Figure 5-21 DID(4)-U13 ETU.
5 - 134
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
The DID ETU is not available in New Zealand.
Figure 5-21 DID(4)-U13 ETU
4.7.2
4.7.3
Installation
1
A maximum of 16 DID(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed
in the Xen Master system (maximum of 64 trunks) in
slots S1~S8 in the first, second or third KSU.
2
A maximum of 4 DID(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed
in the Xen Axis system (maximum of 16 trunks) in
slots S3 ~ S7.
LED Indications
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LED 2~5 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Lines 1~4 busy
✆
4.7.4
System Hardware Manual
Off
Lines 1~4 idle
Connectors
5 - 135
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
The following connector is located on the DID(4)-U13 ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
4.8
TLI(2)-U13 ETU
4.8.1
Description
CN1
The TLI(2)-U13 ETU provides for the termination and
operation of a maximum of two E&M Tie lines (4-wire, Type
I, or Type V, 10 pps or 20 pps, Dial Pulse, or DTMF).
Immediate Start, Delay Start, Wink Start, and second Dial
Tone signalling are also provided. The TLI(2)-U13 ETU
has two built-in DTMF signal detectors. Refer to Figure 522 TLI(2)-U13 ETU.
CH 2
CH 1
LIVE
TYPE V
TYPE V
SW101
TYPE I
SW201
TYPE I
4.8.2
Installation
A maximum of 16 TLI(2)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Master system (maximum of 32 lines) in slots S1~S4
in the first, second or third KSU.
A maximum of 4 TLI(2)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Axis system (maximum of 8 lines) in slots S3 ~ S7.
5 - 136
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 5-22 TLI(2)-U13 ETU
May 2001
4.8.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Table 5-6 TLI(2)-U13 ETU Default Switch
Settings.
Table 5-6 TLI(2)-U13 ETU Default Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
Description
SW101
When lines provided by this unit are used for back-toback connections, set to Type V.
When connection is to a Central Office, set to Type I.
Default: Type V
Switch between Type I
or Type V for Line 1
SW201
When lines provided by this unit are used for back-toback connections, set to Type V.
When connection is to a Central Office, set to Type I.
Default: Type V
Switch between Type I
or Type V for Line 2
4.8.4
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
CH 1 ~ CH 2 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Lines 1~2 busy
✆
4.8.5
Off
Lines 1~2 idle
Connectors
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The following connector is located on the TLI(2)-U13 ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
System Hardware Manual
5 - 137
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.9
ESI(8)-U13 ETU
4.9.1
Description
The Electronic Station Interface ETU provides an 8-port
interface for Multiline Terminals, Attendant Consoles, and
Single Line Telephone Adapter SLT(1)-U13 ADP. Refer to
Figure 5-23 ESI(8)-U13 ETU.
Figure 5-23 ESI(8)-U13 ETU
4.9.2
Switch Settings
SW1 resets the ETU.
4.9.3
Installation
A maximum of 3 ESI(8)-ETUs can be installed in the Xen
Axis system in slots S3-S7, in addition to the 8 ESI ports
provided on the MBD-U13 Unit (maximum of 32 ports).
5 - 138
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
A maximum of 15 ESI(8)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Master system (maximum of 120 ports), in slots
S1~S8 in the first, second or third KSU.
May 2001
4.9.4
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LED1 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Some port(s) busy
✆
4.9.5
Off
All ports idle
Connectors
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The following connector is located on the ESI(8)-U13 ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
System Hardware Manual
5 - 139
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.10
SLI(8)-U13 ETU
4.10.1
Description
The SLI(8)-U13 ETU provides an interface for Single Line
Telephones and for analogue voice mail units. It has a
built-in ringing generator (RSG) and supports a maximum
of eight Single Line Telephones or analogue Voice Mail
ports. Refer to Figure 5-24 SLI(8)-U13 ETU.
This ETU also provides circuitry for loop status detection,
talk battery, sending ringing signals, message waiting, and
loop disconnect for dial pulse signal detection.
Note: The PBR circuit in the CPUB( )-U13 ETU or the PBR (0)U13 ETU is required with Voice Mail or DTMF Single Line
Telephones.
4.10.2
Installation
A maximum of 14 SLI(8)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Master system (maximum of 112 ports) in slots S1~S8
in the first, second or third KSU.
A maximum of 3 SLI(8)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Axis system (maximum of 24 ports) in slots S3~S7.
5 - 140
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 5-24 SLI(8)-U13 ETU
May 2001
4.10.3
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
BUSY indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Some port(s) busy
✆
4.10.4
Off
All ports idle
Connectors
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The following connector is located on the SLI(8)-U13 ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
System Hardware Manual
5 - 141
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.11
SLI(4)-U13 ETU
4.11.1
Description
The SLI(4)-U13 ETU provides an interface for Single Line
Telephones and for analogue voice mail units. It has a
built-in ringing generator (RSG) and supports a maximum
of four Single Line Telephones or analogue Voice Mail
ports. Refer to Figure 5-25 SLI(4)-U13 ETU.
This ETU also provides circuitry for loop status detection,
talk battery, sending ringing signals, message waiting, and
loop disconnect for dial pulse signal detection.
Figure 5-25 SLI(4)-U13 ETU
4.11.2
Installation
A maximum of 23 SLI(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Master system (maximum of 92 ports) in slots S1~S8
in the first, second or third KSU.
A maximum of 5 SLI(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Axis system (maximum of 10 ports) in slots S3~S7.
5 - 142
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Note: The PBR circuit in the CPUB( )-U13 ETU or the PBR (0)U13 ETU is required with Voice Mail or DTMF Single Line
Telephones.
May 2001
4.11.3
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
BUSY indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Some port(s) busy
✆
4.11.4
Off
All ports idle
Connectors
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The following connector is located on the SLI(4)-U13 ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
System Hardware Manual
5 - 143
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.12
OPX(2)-U13 ETU
4.12.1
Description
The OPX(2)-U13 ETU is the interface for two off-premise
extensions. This ETU has a built-in ringing generator
(RSG). A maximum of 1800Ω of loop resistance (including
about 200Ω for the Single Line Telephone) is acceptable
between the OPX(2)-U13 ETU and a Single Line
Telephone.
This ETU also provides circuitry for loop status detection,
talk battery, sending ringing signals from the RSG unit to
the Single Line Telephones, and a dial pulse detection.
Figure 5-26 OPX(2)-U13 ETU
5 - 144
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Note: The PBR circuit in the CPUB( )-U13 ETU or the PBR (0)U13 ETU is required with Single Line Telephone
Connection.
May 2001
4.12.2
Installation
A maximum of 23 OPX(2)-U13 ETUs can be installed in
the Xen Master system (maximum of 46 ports) in slots
S1~S8 in the first, second or third KSU.
A maximum of 5 OPX(2)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Axis system (maximum of 10 ports) in slots S3~S7.
The analogue extension can be located up to 6 kms away
using 24AWG single-pair wiring (maximum 1800Ω loop
resistance, including the internal resistance of the
analogue device).
4.12.3
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LED1 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Some port(s) busy
✆
4.12.4
Off
All ports idle
Connectors
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The OPX(2)-U13 ETU has one connector.
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
System Hardware Manual
5 - 145
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.13 IPT(4)/(8)-U13 ETU
4.13.1
Description
The IP Gateway IPT(4)/(8)-U13 ETU is an optional
interface for the Xen KSU that can combine various trunk
and Tie line calls into Gateway trunks. This ETU can be
assigned as a two-port TLI(2)-U13, four port DID(4)-U13/
COI(4)-U13/COID(4)-U13 ETU, or eight-port COI(8)/
COID(8)-U13 ETU
IPE(4)-U 13
for IPT(8)-U 13 ETU
C onnects to J5
IPT(8)-U13 ETU
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 5-1
5 - 146
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
The IP Gateway trunk board has the following options:
Table 5-7 IP Gateway Options
Configuration
Number of Ports
IPT(4)
IPT(8)
1
COI
4
8
S3~S7
S1~S8
2
COID
4
8
S3 or S4
S1~S4
3
DID
4
4
S3~S7
S1~S8
4
TLI
2
2
S3~S7
S1~S8
#
4.13.2
Installation
The Gateway ETU can be installed in KSU slots that
support the applicable ETU simulated.
The IPT(4)-U13 ETU is converted to IPT(8)-U13 by
installing daughter board IPE(4)-U13 Unit.
Refer to Elite IP Gateway Installation Manual 750367.
4.13.3
LED Indications:
✆
HS
When Switch S1 is placed to PD, this LED lights red.
The IPT ETU starts shutdown. When shut down is
complete, this LED goes off along with all others to
indicate that the ETU can be removed from the KSU.
✆
CH8~1
Indicates the status of associated channel or trunk as
in COID/DID as follows:
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Trunk Status
System Hardware Manual
Installation Slot
Elite 48
Elite 192
COID LED
DID LED
Not Installed or Idle
Off
Off
Incoming
Off
On
Busy
On
On
✆
Live
Flashes red when ETU is receiving power from the
KSU.
✆
Ethernet Status
Two built-in LEDs (one green and one yellow) on the
RJ-45 indicate Ethernet connection status. The
yellow LED is On when the Ethernet link is up. The
green LED flashes to indicate activity.
5 - 147
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
✆
Status
This bi-color (red and green) LED shows status of all
Gateway trunks. When an error is detected, the
location is indicated by the following table.
Trunk Status
LED Condition
Power On
Off
BIOS, Hardware
Start DSP download
Red
DSP Driver
DSP download OK
Red and Green
DSP Download
Successful Application Green
Start
4.13.4
4.13.5
Application Load
IPT(4)-U13 to IPT(8)-U13 ETU Conversion
The IPE(4)-U13 Unit is attached to the IPT(4)-U13 ETU to
convert it to the IPT(8)-U13 ETU. This unit comes with two
attached standoffs with an extra screw in the bottom.
1.
Remove the screw from the bottom of each standoff.
2.
Line up the IPE(4)-U13 Unit standoffs with Holes 1
and 2 and connector J1 with IPT(4)-U13 ETU
connector J5, and press down until the IPE(4)-U13
Unit is firmly attached to the IPT(4)-U13 ETU.
3.
Install the two previously removed screws through
holes 1 and 2 to Connect the standoffs to the
IPT(4)-U10 ETU.
Connectors
The IPT(4)/(8)-U13 ETU has two connectors
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
✆
RJ-45
Connects to the Ethernet
Switch S1
Switch S1 must be in power down (PD) for ETU
installation, and placed in PU to activate the ETU. After the
ETU is activated, S1 is placed in PD to power down the
ETU for removal.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
4.13.6
Error Location
5 - 148
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
4.13.7 Connections
RJ-45
Connector
Gateway
VoIP
Trunk
Trunk
Card Card
Ethernet
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 5-2 IPT(4)/(8)-U10 ETU Connections
System Hardware Manual
5 - 149
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
SECTION 5
OPTIONAL ETUS
Xen Master & Xen Axis
This section describes optional Electronic Telephone Units that provide
additional functions for a Xen system.
5.1
ACD(8)-U10 ETU
5.1.1
Description
The ACD(8)-U10 ETU interfaces the Elite ACD Plus Server to
the Electra Elite KSU. Elite ACD Plus provides Windowsbased software programs to enhance the ACD features of the
Electra Elite Key Telephone System.
COM
1
Figure 5-3 ACD(8)-U10 ETU
5.1.2
Installation
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Only one ACD(8) can be installed in each system in slot
S1~S8 in any Electra Elite 192 system KSU.
5 - 150
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
5.1.3
LED Indications
The front edge of the ETU has 13 LEDs. (Refer to Figure
5-3 ACD(8)-U10 ETU.) LEDs CH1~CH8 indicate the port
status as follows:
✆
On
Port Busy
✆
Off
1
The Live LED is red if ETU is receiving power.
1
The MB LED indicates the status of the MB switch.
1
The DOS (BIOS) LED is red if a BIOS error has
occurred.
1
✆
The Bicolor (BCLR) LED indicates application status
as follows:
Red
DOS started (ACD application not ready)
✆
Green
✆
The hard disk drive (HD) LED flashes red when HDD
is active.
Port idle or not used
ACD application is running
Note: Do not reset the ETU while the HD LED is flashing.
5.1.4 Connectors
The ACD(8)-U10 ETU has the following connectors:
✆
J9
✆
9-pin RS-232(COM1)
Local Serial connector on main ETU for direct
connection.
Connects to the backboard
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
5.1.5 Installation Precautions
The ETUs used in this system make extensive use of CMOS
technology that is very susceptible to static electricity. Static
discharge must be avoided when handling ETUs. Always
use the following precautions:
System Hardware Manual
✆
Wear a grounding strap anytime you handle the ETU.
✆
Make all ETU DIP switch setting changes before
inserting it in the KSU. Ensure that Make Busy switch
is off.
✆
Carry ETU in a conductive polyethylene bag to
prevent static electricity damage.PBR( )-U13 ETU
5 - 151
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
5.2
PBR( )-U13 ETU
5.2.1
Description
The Push Button Receiver (PBR) ETU detects and
translates DTMF tones generated by Single Line
Telephones, modems, or facsimile machines, etc. This
ETU is required if the four built-in PBR channels are not
enough to support all the PBR requirements of the system,
or the CPUB( )-U13 PBRs are dedicated to the VRS(4)U13 ETU. Refer to Figure 5-27 PBR( )-U13 ETU.
Figure 5-27 PBR( )-U13 ETU
Installation
A maximum of one PBR( )-U13 ETU can be installed in the
Xen Master (slots S1~S8) or Xen Axis (slots S2~S7)
systems to provide a total of eight PBR circuits.
5 - 152
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
5.2.2
May 2001
5.2.3
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LED 1 indications are listed below.
✆
On
Some circuit(s) are receiving DTMF
signalling
✆
5.2.4
Off
All PBR(s) are idle
Connectors
The following connector is located on the PBR( )-U13
ETU.
✆
5.3
CN1
Connects to the backboard
VDH2(8)-U13 ETU
5.3.1
Description
The VDH2(8)-U13 ETU integrates both LAN and station
cabling. This is a standard ESI ETU with additional
circuitry for the LAN integration function.
Key Telephones and Attendant Consoles can be
connected to the VDH2(8)-U13 ETU via a VDD-UA Unit.,
CTU(C)-UA Unit or PCT(C)-U13 Unit.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Each VDH2(8)-U13 ETU has a built-in HUB facility that
has eight ports (IEEE 802.3 10Base-2).
System Hardware Manual
5 - 153
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
5.3.2
Specifications
Refer to Table 5-8 VDH2(8)-U13 ETU Specifications.
Table 5-8 VDH2(8)-U13 ETU Specifications
Description
Specifications
General Specifications
Access Method
CSMA/CD Method (IEEE 802.3)
Transmission Speed
10 Mbps
Transmission Interface
10Base-2:1 port
10Base-2 + Dterm Interface:8 ports
Transmission Interface Connectors
10Base-2
BNC (coaxial cable)
10Base-2 + Dterm Interface
RJ45 (modular for 10Base-2)
Transmission Cable Type and Maximum Cable Length
10Base-2
Coaxial Cable – 185 metres
10Base-2 + Dterm Interface
Twisted Pair Cable (LAN Category 3 or higher) – 100
metres for 10Base-2 technology.
5.3.3
Cabling
5 - 154
✆
Normally the 10Base-2 cables connected to the
VDH2(8)-U13 units cannot be directly connected to
another HUB or to a LAN terminal. A set of jumpers is
provided on the VDH2(8)-U13 to turn off the station
abilities for ports 1~7. In this case LAN terminals can
be connected directly to the VDH2(8)-U13 ETU.
Refer to Figure 5-29 VDH2(8)-U13 ETU Connections
for the layout of jumpers on the KTU.
✆
Port 8 is unique in that the station abilities cannot be
separated by changing a jumper setting like ports
1~7. Port 8 is to be used for cascading HUBs.
Connect Port 8 either to another VDH2(8)-U13 (Port
1~7) or an external HUB. In this case be sure to set
SW2 on the VDH2(8)-U13 to ‘=’. If SW2 is set to ‘X’,
then Port 8 is used as a regular Telamux connection.
See Figure 5-28 VDH2(8)-U13 ETU.
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The information listed below applies when connecting the
VDH2(8)-U13 unit.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
May 2001
✆
The VDH2(8)-U13 ETU can be used with 10Base-2
and 10Base-2 cables. VDH2(8)-U13 ETU HUBs can
be cascaded using 10Base-2 cables. The 10Base-2
connector can also be used to connect the VDH2(8)U13 ETU to a LAN backbone. (Refer to Figure 5-29
VDH2(8)-U13 ETU Connections.)
✆
In these cases the port 8 is still used for core line.
The 10Base-2 cable interconnecting VDH2(8)-U13
ETUs must be greater than 0.5 meters. Care should
be taken so the 10Base-2 cables are neatly coiled.
When the 10Base-2 cables are connected to the
VDH2(8)-U13 BNC connector, a terminating plug
must be used if this is the last device on the cable.
Refer to Figure 5-28 VDH2(8)-U13 ETU.
✆
Using the 10Base-2 cables is the preferred method of
cascading VDH2(8)-U13 ETU hubs since it does not
reduce the quantity of station ports that the ETU
can provide.
Figure 5-28 VDH2(8)-U13 ETU
System Hardware Manual
5 - 155
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
BNC
Connector
Jacks (1~8)
Figure 5-29 VDH2(8)-U13 ETU Connections
Terminating
Plug
Figure 5-30 10 Base 2 Cable Connections
5 - 156
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
External LAN or
Next VDH2(8)-U13
ETU
May 2001
5.3.4
Installing the VDH2(8)-U13
✆
A maximum of 9 VDH2(8)-U13 ETUs can be installed
in the Xen Master system (maximum of 72 ports), 3
per KSU in slots S1~S8.
✆
A maximum of 3 VDH2(8)-U13 ETUs can be installed
in the Xen Axis system (maximum of 24 trunks), in
slots S2~S7.
✆
The 10Base-2 ports on the VDH2(8)-U13 ETU use
4-wire polar cables.
✆
When connecting a VDH2(8)-U13 ETU to a multiline
terminal, avoid using under-carpet cables because
the device becomes susceptible to outside noises. It
is better to use EIA/TIA round cables instead of flat
cables. If under-carpet cables are used, you must
follow the installation instructions provided by the
cable manufacturer. Also consider these precautions:
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
✆
+
Limit the under-carpet cable length to 20 metres.
+
When using multiple pair cabling to connect the
VDH2(8)-U13 units to the multiline terminal, do
not include analogue lines in the same cable.
When connecting a VDH2(8)-U13 ETU, use the FCEU13 Unit for proper wiring. Lead the cable connected
to the ETUs out through the clamp on the KSU as
shown in Figure 5-31 Front Cover Extender for
VDH2(8)-U13 ETUs. Refer to Installing a Front Cover
Extender (FCE-U13 Unit) in Chapter 4.
Figure 5-31 Front Cover Extender for VDH2(8)-U13 ETUs
System Hardware Manual
5 - 157
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Figure 5-28 VDH2(8)-U13 ETU shows cable connections
to the LAN using 10Base-2 cabling. Use an EIA/TIA
category 3 (or higher) unshielded twisted pair cable. Do
not use 10Base-2 cable for overhead wiring or for
outdoor wiring.
5.3.5
Switch Settings and Jumpers
Table 5-9 VDH2(8)-U13 ETU Default Switch Settings
indicates the default switch settings for the VDH2(8)-U13
ETU and jumpers settings are given in Table 5-10 Jumper
Settings.
Table 5-9 VDH2(8)-U13 ETU Default Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
Description
SW1
N/A
Reset Switch
XPort 8 Normal Use Mode (LAN
Defines Port 8 communication
mode.
Cable Integration)
SW2
=Port 8 10Base-2 cascades to
another VDH2(8)-U13 ETU or
HUB
Table 5-10 Jumper Settings
5 - 158
Jumper
Setting
1
JP1
JP2
Both 1 and 2 LAN connection only
Both 2 and 3 LAN station integration (default)
2
JP3
JP4
Both 1 and 2 LAN connection only
Both 2 and 3 LAN station integration (default)
3
JP5
JP6
Both 1 and 2 LAN connection only
Both 2 and 3 LAN station integration (default)
4
JP7
JP8
Both 1 and 2 LAN connection only
Both 2 and 3 LAN station integration (default)
5
JP9
JP10
Both 1 and 2 LAN connection only
Both 2 and 3 LAN station integration (default)
6
JP11
JP12
Both 1 and 2 LAN connection only
Both 2 and 3 LAN station integration (default)
7
JP13
JP14
Both 1 and 2 LAN connection only
Both 2 and 3 LAN station integration (default)
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Port
May 2001
5.3.6
LED Indications
LED indications are located on both sides of the ETU as
indicated in Figure 5-32 VDH2(8)-U13 LED Indications.
Figure 5-32 VDH2(8)-U13 LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red
Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LEDs 1~8 indication are listed below.
✆
Steady Green LAN connections on channels 1~8
are established
✆
Steady Orange LAN terminals 1~8 transmitting data
✆
Off
LAN terminals 1~8 not active
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
LED 9 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red
10Base-2 sending data
✆
Off
10Base-2 not active
LED 10 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red
Intercom terminal on some channel
in use
✆
System Hardware Manual
Off
No intercom terminals in use
5 - 159
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
5.3.7
Connectors
The following connectors are located on the VDH2(8)-U13
ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard.
✆
CN2 – CH1~7 Connects to Multiline Terminals.
✆
CN2 – CH8
Connects to Multiline Terminal or
cascade connection to another HUB.
✆
CN3
Connects 10Base-2 cascade cables
from another HUB or mainframe LAN.
When SW2 is set to X, the following table indicates the pin
assignments for the RJ-45 pins for CN2 – CH8.
In the tables below, TD indicates Transmit Data and RD
indicates Receive Data.
Table 5-11 Normal
Pin
Signalling
6
TD-
3
TD+
2
RD-
1
RD+
When SW2 is set to =, the following table indicates the pin
assignments for the RJ-45 pins for CN2-CH8.
Pin
Signalling
6
RD-
3
RD+
2
TD-
1
TD+
Note: Cables that connect a terminal to a HUB are straight, and
cables that connect HUB-to-HUB are crossed. Core line
uses straight cables only.
5 - 160
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Table 5-12 Cascade
May 2001
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45 Straight
1
1
2
2
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45 Reversed
1
1
2
2
Figure 5-33 Cable Connection Comparison
5.4
VRS(4)-U13 ETU
5.4.1
Description
The Voice Recording Service ETU provides record/
playback of voice messages for the Automated Attendant,
Voice Prompt, and Delay Announcement features. The
VRS(4)-U13 ETU must use the built-in PBR circuits on the
CPUB( )-U13 ETU for Automated Attendant or DISA.
Each VRS(4)-U13 ETU has four record/playback
channels. The maximum voice recording ability for each
channel is 240 seconds. The technician can select one of
four message lengths. The available message lengths and
the maximum number of messages that can be recorded
are listed in the following table.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Table 5-13 Message Length
System Hardware Manual
Message Length
Maximum Number of
Recorded Messages
15 seconds
16
30 seconds
8
60 seconds
4
120 seconds
2
5 - 161
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Figure 5-34 VRS(4)-U13 ETU
Installation
✆
A maximum of 2 VRS(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed
in the Xen Master system, 3 per KSU in slots S1~S8
of the first, second or third KSU.
✆
A maximum of 2 VRS(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed
in the Xen Axis system, in slots S2~S7.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
5.4.2
5 - 162
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
5.4.3
Switch Settings
The following table indicates the default switch settings for
the VRS(4)-U13 ETU.
Table 5-14 VRS(4)-U13 ETU Default Switch Settings
Switch
SW1–1
Setting
SW1–1
SW1–2
SW1–3
Record decibel
adjustment
SW1–2
Off
Off
Off
0 decibels (default)
SW1–3
On
Off
Off
1 decibel
Off
On
Off
2 decibels
On
On
Off
3 decibels
Off
Off
On
4 decibels
On
Off
On
5 decibels
Off
On
On
6 decibels
On
On
On
7 decibels
SW1–4
SW2
5.4.4
Description
On
Record Gain
Off
Record Pad (default)
N/A
Test Switch
and
Reset Switch
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
BSY 1~4 indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Channels 1~4 are busy with replay/
record or detecting DTMF signals
✆
5.4.5
Off
Channels 1~4 are idle
Connectors
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The following connector is located on the VRS(4)-U13
ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the backboard
5.4.6
Pins
There are two jumpers labelled SP1 and SP2 located on
the top right of the VRS ETU. These are for maintenance
purposes. Do not change the factory default settings on
these pins. Pins 2 and 3 are to remain short-circuited.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 163
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
5.5
VMS(2/4/8)-U13 ETU
5.5.1
Description
The VMS(2/4/8)-U13 ETU is a 2-, 4- or 8-port Digital Voice
Mail system.
This ETU is a PC platform installed in the Xen system and
contains hard disk space for voice recording storage and
application software. A digital signal processor/voice
processing section handles the following functions:
DTMF detection
✆
DTMF generation
✆
General tone detection
✆
FAX CNG tone detection
✆
PCM compression for audio recording/playback
✆
Automatic gain control (AGC)
✆
A serial port capable of direct connect speeds up to
19.2 Kbps or for connecting external modem.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
✆
5 - 164
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
This ETU provides two, four or eight digital voice mail
ports. The 2- and 4-port require the included digital signal
processor (DSP); the 8-port configuration requires a DSPF-21 Unit. Refer to Table 5-15 Configuration Support
Table.
Table 5-15 Configuration Support Table
Function
Configuration Support
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail with call
forwarding (release transfer)
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail without call
forwarding (await answer transfer)
Voice Mail only (No transfer)
Message Notification
Through message waiting lamps
Call Forwarding
Supported
Applications
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail with call
forwarding (release transfer)
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail without call
forwarding (await answer transfer)
Voice Mail only (No transfer)
Message Notification
Through message waiting lamps
Call Forwarding
Supported
Operator Console
100 (default)
Positive disconnect: Digital Signal
Hardware
One VMS(2/4/8)-U13 ETU
Connections
Connects to backplane connector of the KSU
Telephone
One of the following telephones is required to
program Xen system data:
DTU-8D-1A(WH) TEL
DTU-16D-1A(WH) TEL
DTU-32D-1A(WH) TEL
ETW-16C-1A(SW) TEL (Not available in NZ)
ETW-16D-1A(SW) TEL (Not available in NZ)
ETW-24S-1A(SW) TEL (Not available in NZ)
DSP-F-21 Unit
Adds four additional voice mail ports
Required by VMS(8)-U13 ETU
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Applications
System Hardware Manual
5 - 165
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
5.5.2
Installation
✆
A maximum of 4 VMS(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed
in the Xen Master system, 3 per KSU in slots S1~S8
of the first, second or third KSU, up to a maximum of
16 Voice Mail ports.
✆
A maximum of 4 VMS(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed
in the Xen Axis system, in slots S2~S7, up to a
maximum of 16 Voice Mail ports.
8-port VMS(8)-U13 ETU shown
with 4-port auxiliary DSP installed.
For VMS(2/4)-U13 ETU, the
auxiliary is not required.
DIP Switch
Up = Off
Down = On
COM 1
Local Connection
Figure 5-35 VMS( )-U13 ETU
5 - 166
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Make Busy Switch
May 2001
5.5.3
Switch Settings
The following table indicates the switch settings for the
VMS(2/4/8)-U13 ETU.
Table 5-16 VMS(2/4/8)-U13 ETU Switch Settings
5.5.4
Switch
Description
1
Normally Off
(On to enable COM1)
2
Normally Off
When 1 and 2 are both On, COM1 is enabled for
HOSTKEY and the VM application is stopped for
Maintenance.
3
Normally Off
COM1 local connection.
4
Not Used
LED Indications
The front edge of the ETU has 13 LEDs. (Refer to Figure
5-31 VMS( )-U13 ETU.)
LEDs CH1~CH8 indicate port status as follows:
✆
On
Port Busy
✆
Off
Port idle or not used
The LIVE LED is red if ETU is receiving power.
The MB LED indicates the status of the MB switch.
The BIOS LED is red if a BIOS error has occurred.
The BCLR LED (Bi-colour) indicates application status as
follows:
✆
Red
DOS started (VM application not
ready)
✆
Green
VM application is running
✆
Orange
Error
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Note: If BCLR LED is orange, check error type on console
screen. After error is corrected, LED automatically
changes to green. Do Not connect link between console
and ETU until BCLR turns green during booting.
The HD LED flashes red when the hard disk drive is
active.
Note: Do not reset the ETU while the HD LED is flashing.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 167
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
5.5.5
Connectors
The VMS(2/4/8)-U13 ETU has the following connectors:
5.5.6
✆
J9 connects to the backboard
✆
J1 (9-pin RS-232) is COM1 and is used for PC
Programming of the VMS(2/4/8)-U13 ETU. The PC
can be connected directly or via an external modem.
✆
J8 and J10 accommodation the DSP-F-21 Unit.
✆
J2 and J3 are not used.
Installation Precautions
The ETUs used in this system make extensive use of
CMOS technology that is very susceptible to static
electricity. Static discharge must be avoided when
handling ETUs. Always use the following precautions:
5.6
✆
Wear a grounding strap anytime you handle the ETU.
✆
Make all ETU DIP switch setting changes before
inserting it in the KSU. Ensure that Make Busy switch
is off.
✆
Carry ETU in a conductive polyethylene bag to
prevent static electricity damage.
FMS(2/4)-U13 ETU
5.6.1
Description
The FMS(2/4)-U13 ETU is a 2 or 4 port Digital Voice Mail
system.
5 - 168
✆
DTMF detection
✆
DTMF generation
✆
General tone detection
✆
FAX CNG tone detection
✆
PCM compression for audio recording/playback
✆
Automatic gain control (AGC)
✆
A serial port capable of direct connect speeds up to
19.2 Kbps or for connecting external modem.
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
This ETU is a PC platform installed in the Xen system and
contains Flash ROM space for voice recording storage and
application software. A digital signal processor/voice
processing section handles the following functions:
May 2001
This ETU provides two or four digital voice mail ports.
Refer to Table 5-17 Configuration Support Table.
Table 5-17 Configuration Support Table
Function
Configuration Support
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail with call
forwarding (release transfer)
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail without call
forwarding (await answer transfer)
Voice Mail only (No transfer)
Message Notification
Through message waiting lamps
Call Forwarding
Supported
Applications
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail with call
forwarding (release transfer)
Automated Attendant/Voice Mail without call
forwarding (await answer transfer)
Voice Mail only (No transfer)
Message Notification
Through message waiting lamps
Call Forwarding
Supported
Operator Console
100 (default)
Positive disconnect: Digital Signal
Hardware
One FMS(2/4)-U13 ETU
Connections
Connects to backplane connector of the KSU
Telephone
One of the following telephones is required to
program Xen system data:
DTU-8D-1A(WH) TEL
DTU-16D-1A(WH) TEL
DTU-32D-1A(WH) TEL
ETW-16C-1A(SW) TEL (Not available in NZ)
ETW-16D-1A(SW) TEL (Not available in NZ)
ETW-24S-1A(SW) TEL (Not available in NZ)
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Applications
System Hardware Manual
5 - 169
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Installation
✆
A maximum of 4 FMS(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed
in the Xen Master system, 3 per KSU in slots S1~S8
of the first, second or third KSU, up to a maximum of
16 Voice Mail ports.
✆
A maximum of 4 FMS(4)-U13 ETUs can be installed
in the Xen Axis system, in slots S2~S7, up to a
maximum of 16 Voice Mail ports.
Figure 5-36 FMS( )-U13 ETU
5.6.3
Switch Settings
The following table indicates the switch settings for the
FMS(2/4)-U13 ETU.
5 - 170
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
5.6.2
May 2001
Table 5-18 FMS(2/4)-U13 ETU Switch Settings
5.6.4
Switch
Description
1
Normally Off
(On to enable COM1)
2
Normally Off
When 1 and 2 are both On, COM1 is enabled for
HOSTKEY and the VM application is stopped for
Maintenance.
3
Normally Off
COM1 local connection.
4
Not Used
LED Indications
The front edge of the ETU has 9 LEDs. (Refer to Figure 531 FMS( )-U13 ETU.)
LEDs CH1~CH4 indicate port status as follows:
✆
On
Port Busy
✆
Off
Port idle or not used
The LIVE LED is red if ETU is receiving power.
The MB LED indicates the status of the MB switch.
The BIOS LED is red if a BIOS error has occurred.
The BCLR LED (Bi-colour) indicates application status as
follows:
✆
Red
DOS started (VM application not
ready)
✆
Green
VM application is running
✆
Orange
Error
Note: If BCLR LED is orange, check error type on console
screen. After error is corrected, LED automatically
changes to green. Do Not connect link between console
and ETU until BCLR turns green during booting.
The HD LED flashes red when the Flash ROM is being
accessed.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Note: Do not reset the ETU while the HD LED is flashing.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 171
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
5.6.5
Connectors
The FMS(2/4)-U13 ETU has the following connectors:
5.6.6
✆
J9 connects to the backboard
✆
J1 (9-pin RS-232) is COM1 and is used for PC
Programming of the FMS(2/4)-U13 ETU. The PC can
be connected directly or via an external modem.
✆
J2 and J3 are not used.
Installation Precautions
The ETUs used in this system make extensive use of
CMOS technology that is very susceptible to static
electricity. Static discharge must be avoided when
handling ETUs. Always use the following precautions:
Wear a grounding strap anytime you handle the ETU.
✆
Make all ETU DIP switch setting changes before
inserting it in the KSU. Ensure that Make Busy switch
is off.
✆
Carry ETU in a conductive polyethylene bag to
prevent static electricity damage.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
✆
5 - 172
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
5.7
ECR-U13 ETU
5.7.1
Description
The ECR-U13 ETU provides external relay control for
Zone Paging systems (3 relays), External Ringing control
relays (4 relays), Night Chime ringing control (1 relay), and
two general purpose relays.
There are two RCA audio jacks. One provides the bothway audio-for-paging system (CN3). The other provides a
tone output for External Tone Ringing and Night Chime
(CN4).
ECR-U13 ETU
External BGM
Source
Pin 2
Pin 1
External
Amplifier
CN 2 Connector
SPKR OUT
RL306
Zone A
RL407
Zone B
RL408
Zone Paging
Output from
MDF
Zone C
Pin 3
Pin 4
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
External
Paging
CN 2 Connector
SPKR OUT
CN 3
RCA
Jack
External
Amplifier
Figure 5-37 ECR-U13 Block Diagram - External Paging
System Hardware Manual
5 - 173
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
E C R -U 1 3 E T U
N igh t C h im e
R L 30 5
Ext. Tone R inger
1
RL101
Ext. Tone R inger
2
R L102
Output
from
MDF
Ext. Tone R inger
3
R L203
Ext. Tone Ringer
4
R L204
S pkr
Ringer
Tone
Source
CN4
(RCA)
O ut
External
Amplifier
5.7.2
5 - 174
Installation
A m a xim u m o f on e E C R -U 1 3 E T U ca n b e in sta lle d in
b o th th e X e n M a ste r (slo ts S 1 -S 8 ) a n d th e X e n A xis (slo ts
S 3 S 7 ).
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 5-38 ECR-U13 Block Diagram - External Ringing
May 2001
5.7.3
LED Indications
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
Busy LED indications are listed below.
✆
Steady Red Some Relays Are Busy
✆
5.7.4
Off
All Relays Are Idle
Connectors
The following connectors are located on the ECR-U13
ETU. Refer to Table 5-19 Connector Descriptions (CN2)
and Figure 5-39 ECR-U13 ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the Backboard
✆
CN2
Relay Contacts for Relays 11 and 12
✆
CN3
Both-way Audio
External Paging
✆
CN4
Audio output for Tone Ringer and
Night Chime
Connection
for
Table 5-19 Connector Descriptions (CN2)
Pin Number
13~16
12
11
10
9
5~8
4
Description
Not Used
Relay #2
General Purpose
Relay #1
General Purpose
Not Used
Zone Paging Audio Input
3
2
External Paging BGM input
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
1
System Hardware Manual
5 - 175
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Refer to Table 4-1 MDF Cable Connections - Xen Master
and Table 4-2 Power Fail Transfer Connections - Xen
Master for all other ECR-U13 ETU cable connections.
Figure 5-39 ECR-U13 ETU
Specifications
✆
Relays
All relays are rated 24 Vdc at
500 mA
✆
External Tone
Output Power -10 dBm
✆
Ringer/Night ChimeOutput Impedance 600Ω
✆
External Paging
✆
Output Impedance 600Ω
Output power -10 dBm
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
5.7.5
5 - 176
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
5.8
DPH(4)-U13 ETU
5.8.1
Description
The DPH(4)-U13 ETU provides connection for four
Doorphones (DP-D-1D), and also provides the associated
four Door Lock Release relays.
Doorphones and relays are paired together so that a
station user talking into a doorphone, controls only that
Door Lock Release relay when the feature code is dialled.
The DPH(4)-U13 has two audio paths to be shared by four
doorphones. Two simultaneous doorphone calls are
allowed. Doorphones 1/3 and 2/4 are paired together.
5.8.2
Installation
A maximum of one DPH(4)-U13 ETU can be installed in
both the Xen Master (slots S1~S8) and Xen Axis (slots
S3~S7).
5.8.3
Switch Settings
Refer to Figure 5-40 DPH(4)-U13 ETU and Table 5-20
DPH(4)-U13 Jumper Settings for DPH(4)-U13 ETU default
jumper settings and jumper locations.
Table 5-20 DPH(4)-U13 Jumper Settings
5.8.4
Jumper
Setting
Description
S101
Shorted
DP1 and DP3 removed short bar to
increase DP volume by 6 dB.
S201
Shorted
DP2 and DP4 removed short bar to
increase DP volume by 6 dB.
S102
Shorted
DP1 and DP3 remove shorting bar to
increase DP transmit volume by 6
dB.
S202
Shorted
DP2 and DP4 remove shorting bar to
increase DP transmit volume by 6
dB.
LED Indications
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Live LED indications are listed below.
✆
Blinking Red Normal Operation
✆
Steady Red
Operation Stopped (power still on)
✆
Off
No Power
LED 1 indication are listed below.
✆
Steady Red A Circuit Is Busy
✆
System Hardware Manual
Off
All Circuits Are Idle
5 - 177
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
5.8.5
Connectors
The following connectors are located on the DPH(4)-U13
ETU. Refer to Figure 5-40 DPH(4)-U13 ETU.
✆
CN1
Connects to the Backboard
✆
Relay Connections
Provided at the MDF
✆
Doorphone Connections Provided at the MDF
Figure 5-40 DPH(4)-U13 ETU
5.8.6
Specifications
Relay contacts are 24 Vdc at 500 mA
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
✆
5 - 178
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
May 2001
5.9
CNF(8)-U13 ETU
5.9.1
Description
The Multiline Conference Bridge allows any intercom user
and any outside party calling to a port of the CNF(8)-U13
ETU to make a multiparty conference call. One 8-party
conference or two 4-party conferences are supported and
regulated by a switch setting. System Software release 2
or higher is required.
Figure 5-41 CNF(8)-U13 ETU
5.9.2
Installation
A maximum of 2 CNF(8)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Master system in slots S1~S8 of the first, second or
third KSU.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
A maximum of 2 CNF(8)-U13 ETUs can be installed in the
Xen Axis system, in slots S2~S7.
System Hardware Manual
5 - 179
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
5.9.3
Switch Settings
Table 5-21 CNF(8)-U13 ETU Reset Settings
Switch
Setting
Description
SW2
Press to Reset
Host Reset Switch
Table 5-22 CNF(8)-U13 ETU Maximum Conference Time Switch
Switch
Setting
SW3
Max Conference Time
SW3-2
SW3-3
ON
ON
1 Hour
ON
OFF
2 Hour
OFF
ON
3 Hour
OFF
OFF
No Limit
Table 5-23 CNF(8)-U13 ETU Party Size Switch
Switch
Setting
Description
SW3-1
ON
1 Eight-Channel Conference
SW3-1
OFF
2 Four Channel Conferences
5.9.4
5.9.5
LED Indications
Status
Flashing when active
Channel 0-7
Channel Busy Status
Connectors
This ETU has three connectors:
J1
Connects to the backboard
✆
J2
Not currently used
✆
J3
Nine-pin RS-232C connector for maintenance
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
✆
5 - 180
Installing Electronic Telephone Units
Installing DTU-Type
Multiline Terminals
Chapter 6
SECTION 1
GENERAL
INFORMATION
The Xen system provides six different Multiline Terminals, an Attendant
Console and several adaptors that allow peripheral equipment to be
attached to the Multiline Terminals. With the exception of the VDD-UA Unit,
the adaptors can also be used with DTU-type Multiline Terminals. This
chapter describes each terminal, console, and adaptor and provides
applicable installation instructions.
SECTION 2
MULTILINE TERMINALS
2.1
DTU-8-1A (WH) TEL
This digital non-display Multiline Terminal is equipped with eight
programmable line keys (each with a two-colour LED), a built-in
speakerphone, headset jack, a large LED to indicate incoming calls
and messages, and compatibility with ADA-UA, APR-UA, CTA-UA,
CTU( )-UA, HFU-UA, and VDD-UA Units.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
A maximum of 119 DTU-8-1 (WH) TELs can be installed in the Xen
Master system and a maximum of 31 in the Xen Axis system.
Figure 6-1 DTU-8-1A (WH) TEL Multiline Terminal
System Hardware Manual
6 - 181
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
2.2
DTU-8D-1A (WH) TEL
This digital Multiline Terminal has eight programmable line keys
(each with the two-colour LED), four softkeys, a built-in
speakerphone, headset jack, a Large LED to indicate incoming calls
and messages, and compatibility with ADA-UA, APR-UA, CTU( )UA, CTA-UA, HFU-UA AND VDD-UA Units.
This terminal is also equipped with a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
A maximum of 120 DTU-8D-1A (WH) TELs can be installed in the
Xen Master system and a maximum of 32 in the Xen Axis system.
Figure 6-2 DTU-8D-1A (WH) TEL Multiline Terminal
2.3
DTU-16D-1A (WH) TEL
This digital Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys (each
with a two-colour LED), four softkeys, a built-in speakerphone,
headset jack, a large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages,
and compatibility with ADA-UA, APR-UA, CTU( )-UA, CTA-UA,
HFU-UA, and VDD-UA Units.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
This terminal is also equipped with a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
6 - 182
Installing DTU-Type Multiline Terminals
May 2001
A maximum of 120 DTU-16D-1A (WH) TELs can be installed in an
Xen Master system and a maximum of 32 in the Xen Axis system.
Figure 6-3 DTU-16D-1A (WH) TEL Multiline Terminal
2.4
DTU-32D-1A (WH) TEL
This digital Multiline Terminal has 16 programmable line keys (each
with a two-colour LED), 16 one-touch keys, four softkeys, a built-in
speakerphone, headset jack, a large LED to indicate incoming calls
and messages, and compatibility with ADA-UA, APR-UA, CTA-UA,
CTU( )-UA, HFU-UA, and VDD-UA Units.
This terminal is also equipped with a 3-line, 24-character, adjustable
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
System software can be changed so this Multiline Terminal can have
24 programmable line keys and 8 one-touch keys.
System Hardware Manual
6 - 183
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
A maximum of 120 DTU-32D-1A (WH) TELs can be installed in an
Xen Master system and a maximum of 32 in the Xen Axis system.
Figure 6-4 DTU-32D-1A (WH) TEL Multiline Terminal
2.5
DCU-60-1A (WH) CONSOLE
The Attendant Console has 60 programmable line keys (each with a
two-colour LED). These 60 line keys can be programmed as Direct
Station Selection keys, function keys, or as outside line keys. An
external power supply (AC adaptor) is provided with the Attendant
Console.
Figure 6-5 DCU-60-1A (WH) Console
6 - 184
Installing DTU-Type Multiline Terminals
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
A maximum of four DCU-60-1A (WH) CONSOLES can be installed
in both the Xen Master and Xen Axis systems. An Attendant
Position can have two DCU-60-1A (WH) CONSOLEs attached to it.
May 2001
SECTION 3
CONNECTING A
MULTILINE TERMINAL
TO THE SYSTEM
These instructions for connecting a Multiline Terminal to the system applies
to all of the DTU-type Multiline Terminals.
1.
Plug the telephone cord into the modular jack on the bottom side of
the Multiline Terminal. The handset is also attached to the bottom
side of the Multiline Terminal.
Figure 6-6 Connecting a Multiline Terminal to the System
2.
Lead the telephone and handset cords through the appropriate
grooves.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 6-7 Leading Line Cords on a Multiline Terminal
System Hardware Manual
6 - 185
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
SECTION 4
CONNECTING AN
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
TO A MULTILINE
TERMINAL
Xen Master & Xen Axis
An Attendant Console can be attached to a Multiline Terminal using the
following procedures.
1.
Turn the Multiline Terminal and the Attendant Console face down.
2.
Using the joining plate provided with the Attendant Console, attach
the plate to the Multiline Terminal and the Attendant Console.
Attendant
Console
Multiline
Terminal
Figure 6-8 Connecting an Attendant Console to a Multiline Terminal
3.
Connect the line cord and the AC adaptor to the indicated locations
on the bottom of the Attendant Console.
Figure 6-9 Connecting the Line Cord and AC adaptor when Installing an
Attendant Console
6 - 186
Installing DTU-Type Multiline Terminals
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
AC adaptor Plug
Line Cord Jack
May 2001
4.
When the Attendant Console and the Multiline Terminal are properly
connected, they sit side-by-side as shown in Figure 6-10 Attendant
Console and Multiline Terminal.
Make sure that the AC adaptor, supplied with the Attendant
Console, is used. Using a different AC adaptor may cause
problems. Check that the voltage of the electricity matches that
specified for the adaptor supplied, before plugging it into an outlet.
Figure 6-10 Attendant Console and Multiline Terminal
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
SECTION 5
ADJUSTING THE LCD
The adjustable Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) comes equipped on the display
DTU-type Multiline Terminals. The LCD can be adjusted by pushing
downward and upward as desired.
Figure 6-11 Adjusting the LCD
System Hardware Manual
6 - 187
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
SECTION 6
INSTALLING LINE
CARDS AND PLASTIC
PANELS
Xen Master & Xen Axis
6.1
Line Card and Plastic Panel Installation
Line Cards can be used to print the line key designations. These are
then placed on the Multiline Terminal providing a quick reference of
key designations to the Multiline Terminal users. The Line Cards
can be changed as necessary. The Plastic Panel is placed on top of
the Line Card to hold it in place.
1.
Place the Line Card over the keys on the Multiline Terminal.
2.
Place the tabs on the bottom of the plastic panel into the
grooves at the terminal bottom, and press top right and left
ends to secure plastic panel to the Multiline Terminal. Refer to
Figure 6-12 Installing Line Card and Plastic Panel on a
Multiline Terminal and Figure 6-13 Installing Plastic Panel.
Figure 6-13 Installing Plastic Panel
6 - 188
Installing DTU-Type Multiline Terminals
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 6-12 Installing Line Card and Plastic Panel
on a Multiline Terminal
May 2001
6.2
Plastic Panel Removal
Lift the right corner, raise the panel and slide the bottom away from
the Multiline Terminal.
!
Never pull on the bottom of the plastic panel to
remove it; damage to the plastic panel could result.
Figure 6-14 Removing the Plastic Panel from the Multiline Terminal
SECTION 7
REMOVING SOFTKEYS
If softkeys are not going to be used on the Multiline Terminal they
can be removed. This section describes the process for removing
the keys.
1.
Remove the softkeys by pulling the softkey plate upward as
shown in Figure 6-15 Removing Softkeys.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 6-15 Removing Softkeys
2.
System Hardware Manual
Install the plastic panel again.
6 - 189
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
SECTION 8
ADJUSTING THE
HEIGHT OF THE
MULTILINE TERMINAL
Xen Master & Xen Axis
The base plate on DTU-type Multiline Terminals are hinged. The bottom
portion can be adjusted up or down to raise or lower the height of the
terminal.
1.
Turn the Multiline Terminal upside down and locate the tabs as
shown in Figure 6-16 Locating the Adjustment Tabs on the Multiline
Terminal.
Figure 6-16 Locating the Adjustment Tabs on the Multiline Terminal
2.
Push the adjustment tabs and raise the base plate until it locks.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 6-17 Raising the Base Plate on the Multiline Terminal
6 - 190
Installing DTU-Type Multiline Terminals
May 2001
3.
The length of the cord can be adjusted by pulling the line cord
though the groove in the bottom of the Multiline Terminal.
Figure 6-18 Adjusting the Line Cord Length
4.
To lower the base plate on the Multiline Terminal, push on the
adjustment tabs and push the base plate downward.
Tab
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 6-19 Lowering the Base Plate on the Multiline Terminal
System Hardware Manual
6 - 191
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
6 - 192
Installing DTU-Type Multiline Terminals
Installing Optional
Equipment
SECTION 1
GENERAL
INFORMATION
Chapter 7
Optional equipment is available to enhance the Xen system. This
equipment can be purchased separately from the system and added as the
customer business needs grow. All these adaptors can be installed on the
DTU-Type Xen Multiline Terminals.
A Multiline Terminal can have up to three adaptors installed at the same
time. If attaching an APR-UA Unit, a CTA-UA Unit, a CTU( )-UA Unit, VDDUA Unit or an HFU-UA Unit, an external power supply is required. Only one
power supply is needed even if more than one adaptor is installed.
When an adaptor is installed for the first time into a telephone, the base
cover on the Multiline Terminal may have to be modified. The base cover
has two access panels that are removed before the cover can be closed
over the adaptors to complete the installation.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
SECTION 2
PREPARING MULTILINE
TERMINAL FOR
ADAPTER
INSTALLATION
To prepare the Multiline Terminal for adapter installation:
1.
Unplug the telephone cord from the terminal.
2.
Turn the terminal upside down. Push the tabs indicated in Figure 71 Raising the Base Plate, and raise the inner area of the base plate.
Figure 7-1 Raising the Base Plate
System Hardware Manual
7 - 193
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.
Insert flat head screwdriver into A in Figure 7-2 Unlocking Tab and
press straight down until tab unlocks.
Figure 7-2 Unlocking Tab
4.
Lightly press right side of leg shown as B in Figure 7-3 Releasing
Right Tab, insert flat head screwdriver at C and Press straight down
until other tab unlocks.
Figure 7-3 Releasing Right Tab
Open and remove Bottom Cover by rotating counterclockwise as
shown in Figure 7-4 Removing Bottom Cover.
Figure 7-4 Removing Bottom Cover
7 - 194
Installing Optional Equipment
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
5.
May 2001
6.
If an adapter is being installed, press tabs A and B to remove the
dummy end from the base plate as shown in Figure 7-5 Removing
Base Plate Dummy End.
Figure 7-5 Removing Base Plate Dummy End
7.
Cut the dummy end in half as shown in Figure 7-6 Cutting Dummy
End in Half.
Figure 7-6 Cutting Dummy End in Half
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
8.
If Adapter is installed in Connector 1 as show in Figure 7-7 Installing
Adapter in Connector 1, Install Dummy end B as shown in Figure 78 Installing Dummy End B.
Figure 7-7 Installing Adapter in Connector 1
System Hardware Manual
7 - 195
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Figure 7-8 Installing Dummy End B
SECTION 3
INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES
3.1
ACA-UA Unit (AC adaptor)
This unit provides power to ancillary devices or Attendant Consoles.
The ACA-UA Unit must be connected to an adaptor that is installed
on a Multiline Terminal. If more than one adaptor is installed on a
Multiline Terminal, only one ACA-UA Unit is necessary.
The power requirements for the ACA-UA Unit are:
• Input: 240 Vac, 50 Hz
•
Output: 24V DC, 400 mA
•
Polarity:
Connecting the ACA-UA Unit
1.
Unplug the line cord from the Multiline Terminal and
unplug the ACA-UA Unit from the AC outlet. (Failing
to do this can damage the unit and/or the Multiline
Terminal).
2.
Turn the Multiline Terminal upside down and open the
base plate.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.1.1
7 - 196
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
3.
Locate the AC adapter plug on the ancillary device
that is connected to the bottom of the Multiline
Terminal and plug in the AC adapter.
AC Adapter Plug
Figure 7-9 ACA-UA Unit Connection
3.2
ADA-UA Unit (Ancillary Device Adapter)
Ancillary Device Adapters allow connection of a recording device to
DTU-type Multiline Terminals.
When installing an ADA-UA Unit, first connect the cables to the
ADA-UA Unit, set the dip switches, and then install the ADA-UA Unit
on the Multiline Terminal.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.2.1
Installing an ADA-UA Unit on a Multiline Terminal
1.
Unplug the telephone cord from the Multiline
Terminal.
2.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation.
Refer to Section 2 Preparing Multiline Terminal for
Adapter Installation.
3.
Plug the ADA-UA Unit connector into the receptacle
connector on the back of the Multiline Terminal.
Snap the ADA-UA Unit into the hooks on the Multiline
Terminal to secure it.
Figure 7-10 Attaching the ADA-UA Unit
to the Multiline Terminal
System Hardware Manual
7 - 197
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
4.
Replace base plate.
5.
Lead the audio cable out through the groove on the
base cover. Plug in the telephone cord.
Figure 7-11 Leading the Audio Cable out
from the ADA-UA Unit
3.2.2
Connecting Cables to the ADA-UA Unit
Cable terminal connectors are located on the right side of
the ADA-UA Unit. Cables should be connected on this unit
before installing the unit on the Multiline Terminal.
Terminals
Figure 7-12 ADA-UA Unit
Cut off the plug on one end of the cable.
2.
Locate the adaptor terminals on the right side of the
unit as illustrated in Figure 7-12 ADA-UA Unit.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
1.
7 - 198
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
3.
Remove the cap on the adaptor terminal to expose
the metal receptacle. Push the cable in the applicable
receptacle, and replace the cap. Line up the slot on
the cap with the slot on the metal receptacle to
ensure proper contact. Refer to Figure 7-13
Attaching Cables to the ADA-UA Unit.
Figure 7-13 Attaching Cables to the ADA-UA Unit
Insulate the end of the cable that needs to be
shielded with insulating tape. Table 7-1 ADA-UA
Cable Connections provides a list of cable
connections to ADA-UA ADP terminals and
describes the specifications for the terminals.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
4.
System Hardware Manual
7 - 199
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Table 7-1 ADA-UA Cable Connections
Terminal
Number
T1
T2
Cables to Connect
When warning tone is not being sent
from the recorder, connect wire pair
input from tone generator to T1:T2.
The warning tones from the
generator are sent to T1:T2 on a
dedicated wire pair while the speech
path is sent from the ADA-UA on
T3:T4 over a separate wire pair to the
recorder.
Terminal Specifications
Input Terminal:T1 and T2 are enabled for tone
generating device when DIP switches 3 and 4 are
OFF.
(If switches 3 and 4 are ON, a humming sound may
be recorded due to impedance mismatch.)
Input Impedance on T1 and T2: 100K Ω
Input Level on T1 and T2: –15 dB ~ 40 dB
T3
Connect recorder device wire pair
speech input to T3:T4.
If the recorder used supplies a
warning tone, this tone may also be
sent over the T3:T4 wire pair back to
the terminal.
Input/Output Terminal:
Refer to dip switch settings in Table 7-2 ADA-UA
Unit Switch Settings.
T4
T5
Connect the bare end of the control
cable.
When a Multiline Terminal is idle, this contact is
closed. When the Multiline Terminal goes off-hook
(using the handset, headset, or speakerphone), this
contact is open.
If recorder owner manual specifies start on open
circuit, connect T5 and T6.
T6
Connect the shielded end of the
control cable.
Provides common connection for control cable.
T7
Connect the bare end of the control
cable.
When the Multiline Terminal is idle, this contact is
open. When the Multiline Terminal is busy (using
the handset, headset, or speakerphone), this
contact is closed.
If recorder owner manual specifies start on closed
circuit, connect T6 and T7.
Unused
T9
Unused
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
T8
7 - 200
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
Notes:
•
When recording in handsfree (half-duplex) mode using the built-in speakerphone, the record
warning tone may not be audible to the far-end party.
•
The transmit recording level is lower than the receiving voice level for intercom calls; the transmit
recording level for CO calls is normal.
•
Depending on the recording device(s), separate cables may be required for the warning tone and
speech path. In this case, connect the warning tone cables to input terminals T1 and T2 on the
ADA-UA Unit. (T3 and T4 are used as the Analogue recorder input.)
•
If remote control of the recorder is necessary, the record start/stop control is provided by connecting
to T5 (or T7) and T6 on the ADA-UA Unit.
(Connecting to T5 or T7 is determined by the
specifications of the recorder.)
•
If a warning Tone is provided from the recording equipment, it should be input via T3 and T4 on
ADA-UA Unit. (Do not use T1 and T2 to input Beep Tone.)
•
Conversations cannot be recorded from terminals connected to an APR-UA Unit. Speakerphone
calls through the HFU-UA Unit cannot be recorded.
3.2.3
Switch Settings
The DIP Switch is located at the bottom center of the ADAUA Unit. The DIP Switch allows a technician to configure
the board to specific settings. Figure 7-14 ADA-UA Unit
Switch Settings shows the default settings.
Terminals
Dip Switch
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Default Settings
Figure 7-14 ADA-UA Unit Switch Settings
System Hardware Manual
7 - 201
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
The following switch settings should be made on the
ADA-UA Unit to enable or disable the record start warning
tone. Switch settings should be made before installing the
ADA-UA Unit in the Multiline Terminal. (Refer to Table 7-2
ADA-UA Unit Switch Settings).
Table 7-2 ADA-UA Unit Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
Description
SW1–1
On
If the ADA-UA provides
control to the recorder,
SW1-1 should be set to
On, otherwise set it to
Off.
SW1–2
Off
Leave Off
SW1–3
SW1–3
SW1–4
ON
ON
SW1–3
SW1–4
OFF
OFF
SW1–5
SW1–6
and
SW1-4
SW1–5
Warning Tone from
recorder or generator
equipment on
dedicated wire pair to
recorder MIC input
Input impedance is 600
Ω
and
SW1–6
Warning Tone from
recording device over
same wire pair as
speech path.
OFF
ON
SW1–5
SW1–6
ON
OFF
Input impedance is
less than 600Ω
SW1–7
ON
If warning tone from
any device is sent to
telephone
SW1–8
Off
Leave Off
Do not connect T1 and T2 when switches 3 and 4 are ON.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
*
7 - 202
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
3.3
APR-UA Unit (Analogue Port Ringer)
The Analogue Port adaptor with Ringing provides an interface for
installing Single Line Telephones, modems, NEC VoicePoint
Conferencing unit, and other compatible analogue devices. The
APR-UA Unit also generates ringing signals. By providing ring
generation, the user can install a personal fax machine or an
answering machine for convenience. Two user-adjustable switches
are provided on the adaptor; one allows for 600Ω or a complex
impedance interface to devices such as a modem or Single Line
Telephone, the second switch (SW1) is permanently set to position
2. The APR-UA Unit requires an AC adaptor (ACA-UA Unit). If a
CTA-UA Unit, the CTU( )-UA Unit, or the HFU-UA Unit and an APRUA Unit are both installed, only one AC adaptor is required.
ACA-UA Unit
(AC adaptor)
Figure 7-15 APR-UA Unit
Installing an APR-UA Unit on a Multiline Terminal
1.
Unplug the telephone cord from the Multiline
Terminal.
2.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation.
Refer to Section 2 Preparing Multiline Terminal for
Adapter Installation.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.3.1
System Hardware Manual
7 - 203
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.
Plug the unit into the receptacle connector inside the
base plate. Refer to Figure 7-10 Attaching the ADAUA Unit to the Multiline Terminal.
Figure 7-16 Attaching the Unit to the Multiline Terminal
4.
Plug the cord of the ACA-UA Unit (AC adaptor) into
the jack on the APR-UA Unit. Lead the telephone
cord out through the groove in the base as shown in
Figure 7-17 Leading the Telephone Cord out from the
Unit.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-17 Leading the Telephone Cord
out from the Unit
7 - 204
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
5.
Close the base plate, lead the AC adaptor cord out
through the hole, and snap the cover in place.
Figure 7-18 Closing the Base Plate Cover
6.
3.3.2
Plug in the power cord on the AC adaptor and the
telephone cord in the jack.
Switch Settings
There are two switch settings on the APR-UA Unit.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-19 APR-UA Unit Switches
System Hardware Manual
7 - 205
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
The following table lists the switch settings for SW1
and SW3.
Table 7-3 APR-UA Unit Switch Settings for SW1 and SW3
Switch
Description
SW1–1
Do not use
SW1–2
A Single Line Telephone and Multiline
Terminal are used alternately.
(The Multiline Terminal and the APR-UA Unit
share the same B1 channel.)
SW3–1
Sets impedance to 600Ω for devices such as
modems or facsimile machines
SW3–2
Used for complex impedance devices such as
Single Line Telephones.
3.3.3
Connecting Cables on the APR-UA Unit
Plug the telephone cord from the Single Line Telephone
into the modular jack on the APR-UA Unit.
Limit the cable length from the APR-UA Unit to the Single
Line Telephone to a maximum of 15 metres.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-20 Connecting Cables on the APR-UA Unit
7 - 206
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
3.4
CTA-UA Unit (Computer Telephony Application)
Computer Telephony Application allows a DTU-type Multiline
Terminal to be connected to a PC. The PC can then be used to
perform all of the functions of the Multiline Terminal by using a
TAPI-compatible application software.
Figure 7-21 Attaching an Xen Multiline Terminal to a PC
The CTA-UA Unit is attached to the bottom of a DTU-type Multiline
Terminal.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
ACA-UA Unit
(AC adaptor)
Figure 7-22 CTA-UA Unit
System Hardware Manual
7 - 207
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.4.1
Installing the CTA-UA Unit
1.
Unplug the telephone cord from the Multiline
Terminal.
2.
Prepare Multiline Terminal for adapter installation.
Refer to Section 2 Preparing Multiline Terminal for
Adapter Installation.
3.
Plug the unit into the receptacle connector inside the
base plate on the Multiline Terminal. Refer to Figure
7-16 Attaching the Unit to the Multiline Terminal.
Figure 7-23 Attaching the Unit to the Multiline Terminal
4.
3.4.2
Close the base plate.
Connecting the Cables on the CTA-UA Unit
Figure 7-24 Connecting the RS-232C Cable to the CTA-UA Unit on the Multiline
Terminal
7 - 208
Installing Optional Equipment
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Connect the RS-232C cable from the computer to the
connector on the CTA-UA Unit as shown in Figure 7-24
Connecting the RS-232C Cable to the CTA-UA Unit on the
Multiline Terminal.
May 2001
3.4.3
Installing the Driver on the PC
Using the setup disk provided with the CTA-UA Unit install
the driver onto your PC. Refer to the CTA installation
Guide for instructions on installing CTA setup disks.
3.5
Computer Telephony Adapter with USB Interface
The CTU adapter connects to a PC USB port to provide telephony
and sound device control. The general functions of the CTU include:
✆
Telephony Control
The application is based on the Microsoft Telephony
Application Programming Interface (TAPI) and provides call
handling on the PC (e.g. Call, Answer, Hold, Transfer,
Conference, or Caller ID).
✆
User Interface to support MLT Emulation
This function provides the functions of MLT such as normal
telephone indications, LCD, Line Keys or Hook Switch.
✆
Sound Support
Allows playing and recording sound on an audio device
assigned to the PC. Voice Mail and Live Record are supported
on the PC.
✆
Supports Plug and Play
3.5.1
CTU(S)-UA Unit
3.5.1.1
CTU(S)-UA Unit Connections
This unit is a Computer Telephony Application
adapter to connect your PC’s Universal Serial
Bus to an ESI(8)-U13 ETU. It can be connected
only to a DTU-type Multiline Terminal.
An ACA-U13 Unit (AC Adapter) is required with
this unit.
The following connections are required:
✆ AC Adapter (not provided)
✆ Multiline Terminal
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
✆ PC USB port (USB cable not provided)
System Hardware Manual
7 - 209
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
✆
Line Cable to ESI(8)-U13 ETU
Figure 7-25 CTU(S)-UA Unit
3.5.1.2
Outline
1.
Telephone Stations that support CTU(S)UA
• DTU-8-1A ( ) TEL
• DTU-8D-1A ( ) TEL
• DTU-16D-1A ( ) TEL
• DTU-32D-1A ( ) TEL
2.
Optional hardware to use with Telephone at
same time is restricted to ADA-UA Unit.
The CTU Unit requires an AC
adapter (ACA-UA Unit).
•
WMU-UA Unit is required to wall
mount the telephone fitted with a
CTU Unit.
•
Do not modify CTU’s display
switch.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
!
•
7 - 210
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
3.5.1.3
Connection
A CTU(S)-UA Unit can support an ESI(8)-U13
ETU connection only.
Figure 7-26 CTU(S) Connection
Required Equipment:
3.5.1.4
•
ESI(8)-U13 ETU
•
DTU-type MLT
•
CTU(S)-UA Unit
•
ACA-U13 Unit (AC Adapter) (not provided)
•
USB cable (A to B type) (not provided)
Set-up Sequence
Configure the CTU(S) with the DTU-type MLT
as follows.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
1.
Flip phone upside down.
Figure 7-27 Base of DTU-type MLT
2.
System Hardware Manual
Open DTU-type MLT’s tilt-leg.
7 - 211
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Pull out Line Cord’s modular plug from
Phone’s modular jack.
Figure 7-28 Opening the Base of the DTU-type MLT
3.
PLug the CTU(S) Unit’s connector into
DTU-Type MLT’s Connector #1.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-29 Installing the CTU(S)-UA Unit
7 - 212
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
4.
With both thumbs, press in a & b to remove
the end cover.
Figure 7-30 Removing the End Cover
5.
Replace tilt-leg in original position.
Figure 7-31 Closing the Base
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
6.
Plug AC
Adapter.
Adapter
into
CTU(S)’s
AC
Figure 7-32 Connecting AC Adaptor to CTU(S)
System Hardware Manual
7 - 213
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
7.
Insert CTU(S)’s line cord modular jack into
DTU-Type MLT’s modular jack marked
"LINE" until you hear a click.
Figure 7-33 Connecting the CTU(S) Line Cord
8.
Secure the line cord by slotting it in the tiltleg’s clasp.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-34 Securing the Line Cord
7 - 214
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
9.
Insert the ESI port line cords modular plug
into CTU(S) modular jack marked "LINE"
until it clicks.
Figure 7-35 Connecting the Line to the CTU(S)
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
10. Insert the USB Cable’s Series B square
connector into the USB port.
Figure 7-36 Connecting the USB to the CTU(S)
11.
System Hardware Manual
Once you have inserted the USB Cable’s Series A
connector (rectangular) into the PC’s USB port, the
CTU(S) connection is completed.
7 - 215
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.5.2
CTU(C) Unit
3.5.2.1
CTU(C) Unit Connections
This unit is a Computer Telephony Application
adapter to connect a Universal Serial Bus to a
VDH2(8)-U13 ETU. It can be connected only to
a DTU-type Multiline Terminal.
An ACA-UA Unit (AC Adapter) is required with
this unit.
The following connections are required:
✆ AC Adapter (not provided)
✆ Multiline Terminal
✆ PC USB port (USB cable not provided)
✆ Line Cable to VDH2(8)-U13 ETU
Figure 7-37 CTU(C) Unit
Outline
1.
Telephone Stations that support CTU(C)
✆ DTU-8-1A ( ) TEL
✆ DTU-8D-1A ( ) TEL
✆ DTU-16D-1A ( ) TEL
✆ DTU-32D-1A ( ) TEL
2.
Optional hardware to use with Telephone at
same time is restricted to ADA-UA Unit.
!
7 - 216
•
The CTU Unit requires an AC
adapter (ACA-UA Unit).
•
WMU-UA Unit is required to wall
mount the telephone fitted with
a CTU Unit.
•
Do not modify CTU’s display
switch.
Installing Optional Equipment
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.5.2.2
May 2001
3.5.2.3
Connections
The CTU(C) Unit can support connections from
the VDH2(8)-U13 ETU.
Figure 7-38 CTU(C) Connection
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Required Equipment:
System Hardware Manual
•
ESI(8)-U13 ETU
•
DTU-type MLT
•
CTU(S)-UA Unit
•
ACA-U13 Unit (AC Adapter) (not provided)
•
USB cable (A to B type) (not provided)
•
10-BASE-T cable (not provided)
7 - 217
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.5.2.4
Set-up Sequence
Configure the CTU(C) with the DTU-type MLT
as follows.
1.
Flip phone upside down.
Figure 7-39 Base of DTU-type MLT
2.
Open DTU-type MLT’s tilt-leg.
Pull out Line Cord’s modular plug from
Phone’s modular jack.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-40 Opening the Base of the DTU-type MLT
7 - 218
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
3.
PLug the CTU(C) Unit’s connector into
DTU-Type MLT’s Connector #1.
Figure 7-41 Installing the CTU(C)-UA Unit
4.
With both thumbs, press in a & b to remove
the end cover.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-42 Removing the End Cover
System Hardware Manual
7 - 219
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
5.
Replace tilt-leg in original position.
Figure 7-43 Closing the Base
6.
Plug AC
Adapter.
Adapter
into
CTU(C)’s
AC
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-44 Connecting AC Adapter to CTU(C)
7 - 220
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
7.
Insert CTU(C)’s line cord modular jack into
DTU-Type MLT’s modular jack marked
"LINE" until you hear a click.
Figure 7-45 Connecting the CTU(C) Line Cord
8.
Secure the CTU(C) line cord by slotting it in
the tilt-leg’s clasp.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-46 Securing the Line Cord
System Hardware Manual
7 - 221
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
9.
Insert the VDH2(8)-U13 ETU line cord’s
modular plug into CTU(C) modular jack
marked "LINE" until it clicks.
Figure 7-47 Connecting the Line to the CTU(C)
10. Insert the LAN cable module plug into
CTU(C)’s modular jack marked "PC".
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-48 Connecting the LAN (PC) to the CTU(C)
7 - 222
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
11. Insert the USB Cable’s Series B square
connector into the USB connector.
Figure 7-49 Connecting the USB to the CTU(C)
12. Once you have inserted the USB Cable’s
Series A connector (rectangular) into the
PC’s USB connector, the CTU(C)
connection is completed.
3.6
HFU-UA (WH) Unit (Handsfree Unit)
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The Handsfree Unit provides full-duplex handsfree communication.
Large areas may cause poor full-duplex operation. This unit comes
with the handsfree adaptor and an external microphone. With
terminal upside down, facing from the bottom of the open cover,
install this unit on the left side.
Figure 7-50 HFU-UA (WH) Unit
System Hardware Manual
7 - 223
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.6.1
Installing an HFU-UA (WH) Unit on a Multiline Terminal
Refer to 3.3.1 Installing an APR-UA Unit on a Multiline
Terminal on page -203. The instructions for installing these
units are the same.
3.6.2
Installing the External Microphone
An external microphone can be installed on the HFU-UA
(WH) Unit. These instructions apply to the external
microphone supplied with the HFU-UA (WH) Unit. This
microphone is equipped with a mute button.
Figure 7-51 Microphone with Mute
1.
Plug the microphone cord into the jack on the
HFU-UA (WH) Unit as shown in Figure 7-52
Attaching a Microphone to a Multiline Terminal.
# The microphone should be at least 30 cm away
from the Multiline Terminal, but not more than 1
metre.
Figure 7-52 Attaching a Microphone to a Multiline Terminal
7 - 224
Installing Optional Equipment
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Minimum 30 cm
from Multiline
Terminal
May 2001
3.6.3
Switch Settings
The HFU-UA (WH) Unit uses two-position switches SW1
and SW2.
Figure 7-53 HFU-UA (WH) Unit Switches
The following table lists the SW1 and SW2 switch settings.
Table 7-4 HFU-UA (WH) Unit Switch Settings
SW1
SW2
Position
1
Position
2
Position
1
Position
2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Full Duplex (Default)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Half Duplex (6db mix ratio)
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Half Duplex (12db mix ratio)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Half Duplex (18db mix ratio)
Description
Notes:
Full Duplex: In some large areas or noisy locations half duplex should be
used. There are limits to the echo cancelling ability of the HFU-UA.
Half Duplex: If voice clipping occurs, use a lower decibel setting.
3.7
PCT( )-U13 Unit (PC Telephony Board)
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The NEC PC Board is a multifunction PC-AT add-in card with
telephone, sound system, fax, and modem abilities and combines
multimedia audio, Telephone Application Programming Interface
(TAPI), and a 33.6K fax/data modem. The board is available with/
without the built-in modem.
The PC Board replaces an NEC desk set as the primary telephone
device; the telephone line from the wall now plugs directly into the
PC board instead of the desk set. The desk set can be connected to
the PC board and used as an adjunct or auxiliary telephone. An
external microphone and external speakers can also be connected
to the PC Board
The PC Board allows telephone operations with a headset or
microphone and has the following audio abilities:
System Hardware Manual
7 - 225
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
•
Records audio from the calling or called party of a telephone
conversation
•
Records audio from both parties of a telephone conversation
•
Records audio (or music) from a microphone, line-level device, or
CD player
•
Plays live or recorded audio (or music) through an adjunct
telephone, handset or stereo speakers
The PC Board uses Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
technology through Microsoft Windows 95 or higher to support
speech and data transmission, allow a variety of attachment
devices, and support complex calling features such as conference
calls, call waiting, and voice mail.
The PC Board supports the following terminals:
✆
DTU-type Multiline Terminals.
✆
ETW-type Multiline Terminals
The NEC PC Telephony board can be installed on the ISA bus on
any IBM-compatible PC.
Refer to the PCT Installation Guide provided with the PCT-UA for
installation instructions.
Connecting a MIC/Line-In
✆
If using the microphone input (MIC), connect an
electric condenser microphone. Phantom power
(-2.2 Vdc) is supplied.
✆
If using the line-level input (Line-In), connect to a linelevel device such as a CD or cassette player.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.7.1
7 - 226
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
3.8
SLT(1)-U13 ADP (Single Line Telephone)
The Single Line Telephone adaptor provides an interface for Single
Line Telephones and other similar devices from an ESI ETU
channel. This adaptor can be connected to any ESI port.
3.8.1
Connecting the SLT(1)-U13 ADP to the System
1.
Connect one end of the RJ-11 to the ESI port on the
KSU and one end to the jack on the SLT adaptor
marked ESI.
2.
Connect one end of a second RJ-11 to the jack
marked TEL on the SLT adaptor and the other end to
the Single Line Telephone.
SLT(1)-U13 ADP
T EL
ESI
RJ-11
RJ-11
2-wire
2-wire
ESI
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-54 Connecting a Single Line Telephone to the System using an
SLT(1) U13 ADP
System Hardware Manual
7 - 227
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
.
Modular Terminal
ESI ETU
GN
SLT(1)-U13 ADP
Y
1
T
R
To ESI
3
RD
4
BL
Base Cord
ESI Port
Modular Terminal Connections
Single Line Telephone Connections
Figure 7-55 Connecting the SLT(1)-U13 ADP
Wall Mounting the SLT(1)-U13 ADP
1.
Remove the two screws from the top to open the SLT
adaptor as shown in Figure 7-56 Removing the
Screws from the SLT(1)-U13 ADP.
Figure 7-56 Removing the Screws from the SLT(1)-U13 ADP
7 - 228
Installing Optional Equipment
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.8.2
May 2001
2.
Using the two provided wood screws, attach the unit
to the wall. Close the unit and secure with the two
screws that were previously removed.
Figure 7-57 Attaching the SLT(1)-U13 ADP to the Wall
3.9
VDD-UA Unit (Voice/Data Unit for Digital Terminals)
This unit provides the station and LAN split for digital terminals. This
adaptor can be installed on any DTU-type Multiline Terminal. It is
used when LAN and telephone lines are incorporated into
one cable.
Figure 7-58 VDD-UA Unit
3.9.1
Installing a VDD-UA Unit on a Multiline Terminal
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Refer to 3.4 CTA-UA Unit (Computer Telephony
Application) on page -207. The instructions for installing
these units are the same.
System Hardware Manual
7 - 229
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.9.2
Connecting Cables to the VDD-UA Unit
1.
If the Multiline Terminal is already connected to the
ESI(8)-U13 ETU, unplug the telephone cord.
2.
Plug the cable from the VDH2(8)-U13 ETU and from
the PC LAN board into the modular jacks on the
VDD-UA Unit. The jacks are labelled. Plug the cable
from the VDD-UA Unit into the modular jack on the
Multiline Terminal.
Limit the cable length from the VDH to the PC via the
VDD to a maximum of 100 meters.
# If 10Base-2 cables are reversed on the VDD-UA
Unit, the unit will not be damaged, but the Multiline Terminal will not operate.
10Base-2
Cable to VDH2(8)-U13
10Base-2
Cable to PC
LAN Connection
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-59 Connecting the Cables on the VDD-UA Unit
7 - 230
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
3.10
Wall Mounting
Any DTU-type Multiline Terminal can be mounted on a wall.
Multiline Terminals can be wall mounted by using the base unit that
comes with the Multiline Terminal or by using the WMU-UA Unit to
accommodate adaptors that are installed on the Multiline Terminal.
3.10.1
Removing and Remounting the Handset Hanger
1.
Remove the hanger by sliding it out of the slot.
2.
Install it back in its original position so that the hanger
protrudes providing a rest for the handset. (This
procedure applies when using either the base unit or
the WMU-UA Unit.) Refer to Figure 7-60 Positioning
the Handset Hanger for the steps for removing and
remounting the handset hanger.
þ
À
Ã
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-60 Positioning the Handset Hanger
System Hardware Manual
7 - 231
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.10.2
Wall Mounting using the Base Unit
1.
Refer to Section 2 Preparing Multiline Terminal for
Adapter Installation, and perform Steps 1-5.
2.
Press both sides of the base cover and turn it left to
remove it.
3.
Rotate base cover 180° and install it again on the
Multiline Terminal.
4.
Remove the shaded base plate knockout shown on
Figure 7-61 Removing the Knockout with nippers.
Figure 7-61 Removing the Knockout
5.
Assemble the base plate and base cover.
6.
As illustrated in Figure 7-62 Attaching the Base Plate
to the Wall, attach the base plate and base cover
assembly (wide end down) to the posts on the locally
provided and installed wall plate. Place locally
provided screws in the nodes on the base plate and
secure the assembly to the wall.
Nodes
Nodes
Figure 7-62 Attaching the Base Plate to the Wall
7 - 232
Installing Optional Equipment
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Posts
May 2001
If using a modular jack instead of a wall plate, put the
modular jack inside the base unit as shown in Figure
7-63 Wall Mounting using a Modular Jack. Use the
locally provided screws to attach the base unit
directly to the wall.
Modular
Terminal
Figure 7-63 Wall Mounting using a Modular Jack
7.
Plug the line cord into the jack on the wall plate, wrap
the extra cord and secure it with a tie wrap, and lead
the line cord out through the groove in the side of the
base unit.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-64 Plugging in the Line Cord using a Wall Jack
System Hardware Manual
7 - 233
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
If using a modular jack instead of a wall plate, plug
the line cord into the modular jack, wrap the extra
cord and secure it with a tie wrap, and lead the line
cord out through the groove in the side of the
base unit.
Figure 7-65 Plugging in the Line Cord Using a Modular Jack
8.
With the base plate and base cover assembly
attached to the wall, hook the two bottom tabs on the
base cover into the tab slots on the base of the
Multiline Terminal.
Base Unit
Multiline
Terminal
Line Cord
Wall
Tab
Tab Slots
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-66 Attaching the Bottom Tabs of the Multiline Terminal to the Base
Cover
7 - 234
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
9.
Push up on the Multiline Terminal and lock the top
tabs on the base cover into the tab slots on the base
of the Multiline Terminal. Turn terminal slightly
clockwise to interface with base cover. Figure 7-67
Attaching the Top Tabs of the Multiline Terminal to the
Base Plate shows how the Multiline Terminal is
attached.
Tab Slots
Multiline
Terminal
Tabs
Line Cord
Wall
Wall Mount
Unit
Figure 7-67 Attaching the Top Tabs of the Multiline Terminal to the Base Plate
10.
When properly installed, the wall-mounted Multiline
Terminal looks similar to the one shown in Figure 768 Installed Wall Mount Unit.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
# Do not adjust the tilt panel LCD after the Multiline
Terminal is mounted on the wall.
Figure 7-68 Installed Wall Mount Unit
System Hardware Manual
7 - 235
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.10.3
Installing the Wall Mount Unit and Mounting the Multiline
Terminal using the WMU-UA Unit
If installing an HFU-UA Unit, CTA-UA Unit, CTU( )-UA Unit,
VDD-UA Unit or APR-UA Unit, a separate WMU-UA Unit
must be purchased to accommodate these units.
1.
Remove the line cord, base plate and base cover
from the Multiline Terminal as shown in the previous
section.
2.
Cut off the tabs on the adaptor as shown in Figure 769 Removing the Tabs from the adaptor.
Figure 7-69 Removing the Tabs from the adaptor
Remove the tabs from the WMU-UA Unit as shown in
Figure 7-70 Removing the Tabs from the WMU-UA
Unit. (Tabs removed depends on the Multiline
Terminal type.)
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
DTU-8-1A (WH) TEL
DTU-8D-1A (WH) TEL
DTU-16D-1A (WH) TEL
DCU-60-1A (WH) CONSOLE
DTU-32D-1A (WH) TEL
Figure 7-70 Removing the Tabs from the WMU-UA Unit
7 - 236
Installing Optional Equipment
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
3.
May 2001
4.
Bundle the cord from the modular jack leaving about
eight inches. Use a tie wrap to secure the
bundled cord.
5.
Place the bundled line cord in the space between the
WMU-UA Unit and the wall. Lead the line cord out
through the slits as shown in Figure 7-71 Leading the
Line Cord out of the WMU-UA Unit.
Figure 7-71 Leading the Line Cord out of the WMU-UA Unit
6.
Attach the WMU-UA Unit to the posts on the wall
plate (locally provided). Place locally provided screws
in the nodes on the WMU-UA Unit and secure the
WMU-UA Unit to the wall.
Nodes
Posts
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Nodes
Figure 7-72 Attaching the Wall Mount Unit to the Wall
7.
System Hardware Manual
Connect the line cord to the Multiline Terminal.
7 - 237
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
8.
With the WMU-UA Unit attached to the wall, hook the
two bottom tabs on the WMU-UA Mount Unit into the
tab slots on the Multiline Terminal. Then push the two
top tabs on the WMU-UA Unit into the tab slots on the
Multiline Terminal. If the adaptor has a power supply,
lead the AC adaptor cord out through the opening at
the bottom of the Multiline Terminal. Refer to Figure
7-73 Attaching the Multiline Terminal to the WMU-UA
Unit.
WMU-UA
Unit
Multiline
Terminal
adaptor
Tab Slots
Wall
Figure 7-73 Attaching the Multiline Terminal to the WMU-UA Unit
3.10.4
Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Base Cover
Figure 7-74 Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Base Cover
7 - 238
Installing Optional Equipment
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
To remove the Multiline Terminal from the base cover, lift
the Multiline Terminal to disengage top tabs, turn it slightly
counter clockwise to unlock lower tabs on base cover, and
remove it.
May 2001
3.10.5
Removing the Multiline Terminal from the WMU-UA Unit
To remove the Multiline Terminal from the WMU-UA Unit,
lift the Multiline Terminal to disengage top tabs and lower
the terminal from the WMU-UA Unit.
3.11
Music on Hold
The Xen Master and Xen Axis KSUs allow a Music on Hold source
to be connected to the system. Both Internal and External music
sources can be used. External Music on hold is unavailable if an
Internal Music source is used (digital music).
3.11.1
Connecting Audio Sources to the KSU
Connect the plug end into the AUDIO IN 1 jack on the side
of the Xen Master Basic KSU or into the MOH IN jack
inside the Xen Axis KSU. Refer to Figure 7-75 Music
Source Connections.
Xen Master
AUDIO IN 1
Audio Shielded
Cable
MOH
IN
Output
Music Source
Power
Terminal
Xen Axis
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
MOH
IN
Audio Shielded
Cable
Output
Music Source
Power
Terminal
Figure 7-75 Music Source Connections
System Hardware Manual
7 - 239
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Alternatively, multiple Music On Hold sources can be
connected via a free COI port and an approved Line
Isolation Unit (LIU). Any number of MOH sources can be
connected in this way, limited only by the number of COI
ports available in the system.
The LIU must provide 48Vdc to the COI port. One suitable
LIU is the Batesford Electronics Model No. TIC2F2. This
will require connection to a 240Vac mains power outlet.
MDF
COI
LIU
Music Source
Figure 7-76 Connecting a Music Source via a COI Port
3.12
Station Background Music
Station Background Music can be provided using an internal or an
external source. The same connection used for Music on Hold can
be used for Station Background Music. (Refer to Section 3.11 Music
on Hold).
Alternatively, one Station background Music source can be
connected via a free COI port and an approved Line Isolation Unit
(LIU). Refer to Section 3.11 Music on Hold, Figure 7-76 Connecting
a Music Source via a COI Port.
3.13
Paging Connections
When connecting background music, the ECR-U13 ETU is used for
the interface with Paging In/Out, Background Music (External
Speaker) Out and/or External Tone Ringer/Night Chime Out.
3.14
Connecting a KSU to a Personal Computer
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
To use the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (Xen Master Only),
Least Cost Routing (LCR), and PC Programming, specialized
software must installed in the user PC and the PC must be
connected via a serial port to the KSU.
7 - 240
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
3.14.1
Connecting the PC to the KSU
Using an RS232C straight cable, connect the PC to one of
the COM ports on the KSU. Refer to Figure 7-77
Connecting a PC to the KSU.
The functions and the communication port connections
are:
Table 7-5 Functions and Communication Port Connections
Function
Port
PC Programming
COM 1
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
COM 1
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
COM 2
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
COM 4
(Xen Master only)
Serial-port characteristics include:
Table 7-6 Serial Port Characteristics
Characteristic
Value
19.2 K (maximum)
Parity
None
Stop Bit
1 stop bit
Data Bit
8 bits
Port Type
DCE
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Baud Rate
System Hardware Manual
7 - 241
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Xen Master
Xen Axis
Figure 7-77 Connecting a PC to the KSU
3.14.2
Connecting the Printer to the KSU
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
When using the SMDR charge control ability, connect the
printer to the KSU to allow the printing of the charge data.
Connect the printer to the serial port on the KSU with an
RS 232C straight cable. Use the COM 2 port to connect
the printer.
7 - 242
Installing Optional Equipment
May 2001
3.14.3
Remote Programming using the Built-in MIF-Modem
(MDM-U13 Unit)
The following characteristics apply to the built-in modem.
Table 7-7 Modem Specifications
Characteristic
Value
Baud Rate
28.8 Kbps
Parity
None
Stop Bit
1
Data Bit
8
A feature of the PC Programming software is to allow
Remote Programming via a Modem.
The modem could be a locally provided external unit
connected to COM 1 via an SLI port or an SLT Adapter, or
it could be the MDM-U13 Unit installed onto the
MIFM U13 ETU.
By calling in to the modem station number (a phantom
number in the case of the MIF-Modem port) a remotely
located modem can establish communications with the
system for the purpose of transferring system or LCR data
MDF
To COM 1
KSU
Modem
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 7-78 Connecting an External Modem
System Hardware Manual
7 - 243
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
7 - 244
Installing Optional Equipment
Installing ETW-Type
Multiline Telephones
SECTION 1
GENERAL
INFORMATION
ETW-type Multiline Terminals can be installed on a Xen system providing
inexpensive migration to the Xen system. This chapter provides instructions
for connecting these terminals to the Xen system.
#
SECTION 2
ETW-TYPE MULTILINE
TERMINALS
Chapter 8
ETW-type Multiline Terminals are not available in New Zealand.
The following ETW-type Multiline Terminals can be connected to the
Xen system.
Table 8-1
ETW-8E-1A (SW) TEL
ETW-16C-1A (SW) TEL
ETW-16D-1A (SW) TEL
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
ETW-24S-1A (SW) TEL
EDW-48-2A (SW) DSS/BLF Console
System Hardware Manual
8 - 245
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
SECTION 3
CONNECTING AN ETWTYPE MULTILINE
TERMINAL TO THE XEN
SYSTEM
Xen Master & Xen Axis
3.1
Terminal Update
Before ETW-type Multiline Terminals can be operated on a Xen
system, the keypad must be changed. Replacement keypads and
installation instructions are available for purchase from the NEC
PPG Service Department.
3.2
Modular Terminal Connections
3.2.1
Connecting Multiline Terminals, Attendant Add-On
Consoles, and SLT Adapters
When connecting ETW-type Multiline Terminals or
Attendant Add-On Consoles, or SLT Adapters to the MDF
or IDF, individually twisted 1-pair cabling must be used.
Refer to Figure 8-1 Modular Terminal Connections for
Multiline Terminals & Attendant Add-On Consoles for an
illustration of connections.
To
MDF
YL
BK
Station
Cable
Y
B
Å Ñ
Modular
Terminal
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 8-1 Modular Terminal Connections for Multiline Terminals & Attendant
Add-On Consoles
8 - 246
Installing ETW-Type Multiline Telephones
May 2001
3.3
Attach a Multiline Terminal to the System
1.
Plug a telephone cord into the modular jack on the bottom side
of the Multiline Terminal.
2.
Lead the cord out through the cord groove as shown in Figure
8-2 Connect an ETW-type Multiline Terminal to the Xen
system.
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
Figure 8-2 Connect an ETW-type Multiline Terminal to the Xen system
System Hardware Manual
8 - 247
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
Xen Master & Xen Axis
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
8 - 248
Installing ETW-Type Multiline Telephones
Glossary of
Abbreviations
Appendix A
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
The following table includes common abbreviations used throughout this
document that are listed in alphabetical order.
Abbreviations
Definition
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution
Provides a cost-effective method for supervising incoming telephone traffic
and associated staff activity.
ACR
Automatic Carrier Routing
Chooses the preferred trunk for an outgoing call based on the external
telephone number dialled.
BNC
Bayonet-Neill-Concelman
Connector for slim coaxial cables.
Ethernet.
BRI
Basic Rate Interface
ISDN subscriber interface. BRI has two bearer B-channels at 64 Kbps per
second and a D-channel at 16 Kbps per second. The bearer B-channels are
provided for PCM voice, video conferencing, group 4 facsimile machines,
and other similar types of transmissions. The data D-channel used to bring
in information about incoming calls and take out information about outgoing
calls. BRI can also be used to access slow-speed data networks such as
videotex and packet switched networks.
There are two BRI standards:U Interface – 2-wire
T Interface – 4-wire
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRC is a common method to establish that the data is correctly received in
data communications. This process checks the integrity of a block of data. A
CRC character is generated at the transmission end. Its value depends on
the hexadecimal value of the number of ones in the data block. The
transmitting device calculates the value and appends it to the data block.
The receiving end makes a similar calculation and compares its results with
the added character. If there is a difference, the recipient requests
retransmission.
DN
Directory Number
Unique number (phone number) assigned to each telephone or data
terminal.
DNIS
Dialled Number Identification Service
Allows the display of a name, extension number and caller ID for incoming
DID calls on subscribed ISDN lines.
System Hardware Manual
This is similar to ones used with
A - 249
A - 250
Xen Master & Xen Axis
Abbreviations
Definition
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
An international plan to migrate the public switched network to the universal
implementation of standard digital technology.
LCR
Least Cost Routing
A feature that automatically chooses the lowest cost phone line to the
destination.
OPX
Off-Premise Extension
A telephone that is located in a different office or building from the mail
phone system. The OPX is connected by a dedicated telephone line. This
extension has all abilities of the mail phone system.
PRI
Primary Rate Interface
ISDN subscriber interface. PRI has 30 bearer B-channels at 64 Kbps per
second and a D-channel at 64 Kbps per second. The bearer B-channels are
provided for PCM voice, video conferencing, group 4 facsimile machines
and other similar types of transmissions. The data D-channel is used to
bring in information about incoming calls and take out information about
outgoing calls. PRI can also be used to access slow-speed data networks
such as videotex and packet switched networks.
There are two PRI standards: U Interface – 2 wire
S/T Interface – 4 wire
SLIP
Serial Line Internet Protocol
An Internet protocol is used to run IP over serial lines such as telephone
circuits. IP is the Internet Protocol; the most important of all protocols on
which the Internet is based. This protocol allows a packet to traverse
multiple networks before it reaches its final destination.
SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording
A feature that collects and records information on outgoing calls by station.
SPID
Service Profile Identifier
IDSN service is ordered with certain parameters. The SPID is an eight to 12
digit number that uniquely identifies the service ordered. The phone
company assigns an SPID for every phone number. Each ISDN BRI line
usually has two phone numbers.
The SPID is a label identifier that points to a particular location on the
telephone company central office memory that stores the details of the ISDN
services ordered. This number is necessary for the operation of the ISDN
phone, fax, or PC software. Without this number, ISDN services cannot be
accessed.
VoIP
Voice over Internet Protocol
The ability to carry normal telephone-style voice over an IP-based internet
with POTS-like functionality and voice quality.
The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) connects to the LAN IP
network through a VoIP gateway. Digitised speech is transported through IP
packets and can include real-time conversation or voice mail. The IP
network can be public or private, and voice transport can be phone-tophone, computer-to-phone or computer-to-computer.
Glossary of Abbreviations
A6-324000-642-01 – Release 4.0
May 2001
NEC Australia Pty Ltd

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project